infiniti g37-09-coupe5

DRIVER CONTROLS

C

D

E

SECTION INLA

B

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

NL

N

O

P

CONTENTS

I

BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 3

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 3Work Flow .................................................................3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM ..... 5

System Diagram ........................................................5System Description ...................................................5Component Parts Location ........................................7Component Description ............................................8

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM .............................................................. 9

System Diagram ........................................................9System Description ...................................................9Component Parts Location ......................................10Component Description ..........................................10

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM ................12System Diagram ......................................................12System Description .................................................12Component Parts Location ......................................13Component Description ...........................................13

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................14

COMMON ITEM .........................................................14COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) .....................................................14

INT LAMP ..................................................................15INT LAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INT LAMP) .....................................................................16

BATTERY SAVER .....................................................17BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) ...............................................17

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .........................19

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....19

BCM ...........................................................................19BCM : Diagnosis Procedure ....................................19

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ............................................................20

Description ...............................................................20Component Function Check ....................................20Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT ...22


STEP LAMP CIRCUIT .......................................24Description ...............................................................24Component Function Check ....................................24Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24

TRUNK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT .......................26Description ...............................................................26Component Function Check ....................................26Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMI-NATION CIRCUIT .............................................28


INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM ...30

Wiring Diagram - INTERIOR ROOM LAMP - ..........30

ILLUMINATION .................................................37Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION - .........................37

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ..............47

INL-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................. 47Reference Value ..................................................... 47Wiring Diagram - BCM - ......................................... 70Fail-safe .................................................................. 75DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 77DTC Index .............................................................. 79

COMBINATION METER .................................... 82Reference Value ..................................................... 82Wiring Diagram - METER - ..................................... 85Fail-safe .................................................................. 94DTC Index .............................................................. 95

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 96

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 96Symptom Table ...................................................... 96

PRECAUTION ............................................. 97

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 97Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ................................................................. 97Precaution for Battery Service ................................ 97

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 98

MAP LAMP ........................................................ 98Exploded View ........................................................ 98Removal and Installation ........................................ 98

Replacement ........................................................... 98

VANITY MIRROR LAMP ................................... 99Exploded View ........................................................ 99Replacement ........................................................... 99

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION ..........100Exploded View ...................................................... 100Replacement ......................................................... 100

GLOVE BOX LAMP ..........................................101Exploded View ...................................................... 101Replacement ......................................................... 101

STEP LAMP ......................................................102Exploded View ...................................................... 102Removal and Installation ....................................... 102Replacement ......................................................... 102

TRUNK ROOM LAMP ......................................103Exploded View ...................................................... 103Removal and Installation ....................................... 103Replacement ......................................................... 103

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .........................................................104

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................104

Bulb Specifications ................................................ 104


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P

< BASIC INSPECTION >

I

BASIC INSPECTIONDIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW

Work Flow INFOID:0000000004248990

OVERALL SEQUENCE

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION

Interview the symptom to the customer.

JPLIA0313GB


>> GO TO 2.

2.SYMPTOM CHECK

Check the symptom from the customer's information.

>> GO TO 3.

3.BASIC INSPECTION

Check the operation of each part. Check that any symptom occurs other than the interviewed symptom.

>> GO TO 4.

4.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III

Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III. Check that any DTC is detected.Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 6.

5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC

Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Specify the malfunctioning part.

>> GO TO 9.

6.FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION CHECK

Check that the symptom is applied to the fail-safe activation.Does the fail-safe activate?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> GO TO 8.

7.SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Perform the system diagnosis for the system that the fail-safe activates. Specify the malfunctioning part.

>> GO TO 9.

8.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Perform the symptom diagnosis. Specify the malfunctioning part.

>> GO TO 9.

9.MALFUNCTION PART REPAIR

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

>> GO TO 10.

10.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III)

Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III. Check that any DTC is not detected. Erase DTC if DTC isdetected before the repair. Check that DTC is not detected again.Is any DTC detected?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 11.

11.REPAIR CHECK (OPERATION CHECK)

Check the operation of each part.Does it operate normally?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 3.


INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

I

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONINTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM

System Diagram INFOID:0000000004248991

System Description INFOID:0000000004248992

OUTLINE• Interior room lamps* are controlled by interior room lamp timer control function of BCM.

*: Map lamp (when map lamp switch is in DOOR position).• Trunk room lamp is controlled by trunk room lamp control function of BCM.• Step lamp is controlled by step lamp control function of BCM.• Push-button ignition switch illumination is controlled by the push-button ignition switch illumination control

function of BCM.

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER CONTROL

Interior Room Lamp Timer Basic Operation

JSLIA0133GB

JPLIA0093GB


< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• The interior room lamp turns ON and OFF (gradual brightening and dimming) by the interior room timer.• BCM judges the vehicle condition with the following items. It activates the interior room timer.- Ignition switch status- Door switch signal (ALL)- Door lock/unlock signal (Remote keyless entry receiver, each request switch, key cylinder lock/unlock
switch, central door lock/unlock switch)NOTE:Each function of interior room lamp timer can be set by CONSULT-III. Refer to INL-16, "INT LAMP : CON-SULT-III Function (BCM - INT LAMP)".

Interior Room Lamp ON Operation• BCM always turns the interior room lamp ON when any door opens.• BCM activates the interior room lamp timer in any of the following conditions to turn the interior room lamp

ON for a period of time.- Any door opens before all doors close.- Ignition switch is turned ON → OFF.- Any door unlock signal is detected when all doors close with ignition switch OFF. NOTE:Restart the timer if new condition is input during the timer operating time.

Interior Room Lamp OFF OperationBCM stops the timer in any of the following conditions to turns the interior room lamp OFF.• The timer operating time is expired.• Ignition switch position is other than OFF with all doors close.• Any door lock operation is detected with all doors close.

TRUNK ROOM LAMP CONTROLBCM controls the trunk room lamp (ground-side) to turn ON with the trunk room lamp switch ON.

STEP LAMP CONTROLBCM controls the step lamp (ground-side) to turn ON with any door switch ON.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CONTROL

Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination Basic Operation• BCM provides the power supply and the ground to turn the push-button ignition switch illumination ON.• BCM cuts the ground supply while the each illumination (tail lamp) ON. BCM switches to the ground control

with the meter illumination control function.

Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination ON OperationBCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination ON in the following conditions.• Ignition switch ON• Each illumination (tail lamp) ON• Any of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF- Engine start permission is entered.- Intelligent Key inserted into the key slot. - Driver door is LOCK → UNLOCK.- Driver door is open.

Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination OFF OperationBCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination OFF in any of the following conditions.• The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not satisfy.• All of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF- Each illumination (tail lamp) OFF- The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not change (15 seconds after the ignition

switch OFF) or the driver door is UNLOCK → LOCK.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004248993

1. Key cylinder switch 2. Request switch 3. Step lamp

4. Door switch 5. Door lock and unlock switch 6. Push-button ignition switch(Push-button ignition switch illumination)

7. Map lamp 8. Remote keyless entry receiver 9. BCM

10. Trunk room lamp switch 11. Trunk room lamp

A. Behind the glove box B. Dash side lower (passenger side) C. Trunk lid lock assembly

D. Trunk room upward

JPLIA0589ZZ


Component Description INFOID:0000000004248994

Part Description

BCM

• Activates the interior room lamp timer depending on the vehicle condition to turn the interior room lamp ON/OFF.

• Turns the trunk room lamp ON /OFF according to the trunk room lamp switch status.• Turns the step lamp ON /OFF according to any door switch status.

Remote keyless entry receiver Transmits the lock/unlock signal to BCM.

• Door lock and unlock switch• Key cylinder switch

Transmits a switch signal by power window switch serial link.

• Request switch• Door switch• Trunk room lamp switch

Inputs a switch signal to BCM.


INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I




OUTLINE• Interior room lamp battery saver is controlled by BCM.• BCM turns applicable lamps OFF depending on the vehicle condition. This function prevents the battery

from over-discharging if the driver neglect turning OFF the any lamps.

Applicable lamps• Map lamp• Step lamp• Trunk room lamp• Vanity mirror lamp

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER FUNCTION• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, BCM operates the timer for a period of time to cut the interior room

lamp power supply.• BCM restart the timer when any of the following signals changes while operating the timer.- Ignition switch status- Door switch signal (ALL)- Door lock/unlock signal (Remote keyless entry receiver, each request switch, key cylinder lock/unlock

switch, central door lock/unlock switch)- Trunk loom lamp switch signal- Key switch signal (Key slot)• BCM provides the interior room lamp power supply continuously when the ignition switch position is other

than OFF.NOTE:Each function of interior room lamp battery saver can be set by CONSULT-III. Refer to INL-17, "BATTERYSAVER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)".

JSLIA0134GB




1. Key cylinder switch 2. Request switch 3. Step lamp

4. Door switch 5. Door lock and unlock switch 6. Push-button ignition switch

7. Map lamp 8. Vanity mirror lamp 9. Remote keyless entry receiver

10. BCM 11. Trunk room lamp switch 12. Trunk room lamp

A. Behind the glove box B. Dash side lower (passenger side) C. Trunk lid lock assembly

D. Trunk room upward

JPLIA0590ZZ

Part Description

BCMOperates the interior room lamp battery saver depending on the vehicle condition to cut the interior room lamp power supply.

Remote keyless entry receiver Transmits the lock/unlock signal to BCM.



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

• Door lock and unlock switch• Key cylinder switch

Transmits a switch signal by power window switch serial link.

• Request switch• Door switch• Trunk room lamp switch

Inputs a switch signal to BCM.

Key slot Inputs the key switch status to BCM.

Part Description


ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM



OUTLINEEach illumination lamp is controlled by each function of BCM, IPDM E/R and combination meter.

Control by BCM• Combination switch reading function• Headlamp control function

Control by IPDM E/R• Relay control function

Control by combination meter• Meter illumination control function (Refer to MWI-25, "METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Dia-

gram".)

ILLUMINATION CONTROL• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.• BCM transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter (through the unified meter

and A/C amp.) according to tail lamp ON condition.

Tail lamp ON condition- Lighting switch 1ST- Lighting switch 2ND- Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function ON judgment (With auto light system)• IPDM E/R turns the integrated tail lamp relay ON according to position light request signal. It provides the

power supply to each illumination lamp. • Combination meter enters in the nighttime mode according to position light request signal. Under the night-

time mode the combination meter controls the illuminance by controlling the each illumination lamp (groundside).

JPLIA0092GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I



1. Combination switch 2. Illumination control switch 3. Combination meter

4. BCM 5. IPDM E/R 6. Unified meter and A/C amp.

A Dash side lower (passenger side) B. Engine room dash panel (RH) C. Behind the cluster lid C

JPLIA0591ZZ

Part Description

BCM

• Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function.• Judges the illumination lamp ON/OFF status depending on the vehicle condition.

And then it transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter [with CAN communication (through the unified meter and A/C amp.)] .

IPDM E/RControls the integrated relay according to the request from BCM (with CAN communi-cation).

Combination meter

• Enters in nighttime mode according to the request from BCM (with CAN communi-cation).

• Controls the each illumination in the nighttime mode.Refer to MWI-25, "METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Diagram".

Combination switch(Lighting & turn signal switch)

Refer to BCS-6, "System Diagram".


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)COMMON ITEM

COMMON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000004684063

APPLICATION ITEMCONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATIONBCM can perform the following functions for each system.NOTE:It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.

×: Applicable item

NOTE:

*: This item is displayed, but is not used.

FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays onCONSULT-III.

Diagnosis mode Function Description

Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.

Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.

CAN Diag Support MonitorMonitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM. Refer to CONSULT-III opera-tion manual.

Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed.

Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.

Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.

Configuration This function is not used even though it is displayed.

System Sub system selection itemDiagnosis mode

Work Support Data Monitor Active Test

Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×

Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×

Warning chime BUZZER × ×

Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×

Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×

Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×

— AIR CONDITONER*

• Intelligent Key system• Engine start system

INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×

Combination switch COMB SW ×

Body control system BCM ×

IVIS - NATS IMMU × ×

Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×

Trunk lid open TRUNK × ×

Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × ×

RAP system RETAINED PWR* ×

Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×

TPMS TPMS (AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) × × ×



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

INT LAMP

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description

Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected

Vehicle Condition

SLEEP>LOCK

Power position status of the moment a particular DTC is detected

While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)

SLEEP>OFFWhile turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.)

LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from “LOCK” to “ACC”

ACC>ON While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “IGN”

RUN>ACCWhile turning power supply position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle is stopping and selector lever is except P position.)

CRANK>RUNWhile turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From cranking up the engine to run it)

RUN>URGENTWhile turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-gency stop operation)

ACC>OFF While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “OFF”

OFF>LOCK While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “LOCK”

OFF>ACC While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “ACC”

ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”

OFF>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCK>SLEEPWhile turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode

LOCKPower supply position is “LOCK” (Ignition switch OFF with steer-ing is locked.)

OFFPower supply position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF with steering is unlocked.)

ACC Power supply position is “ACC” (Ignition switch ACC)

ONPower supply position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)

ENGINE RUNPower supply position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)

CRANKING Power supply position is “CRANKING” (At engine cranking)

IGN Counter 0 - 39

The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition

whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.


INT LAMP : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000004249004

WORK SUPPORT

*: Factory setting

DATA MONITOR

JPLIA0093GB

Service item Setting item Setting

SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCONON* With the interior room lamp timer function

OFF Without the interior room lamp timer function

ROOM LAMP TIMER SET

MODE 2 7.5 sec.

Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time)MODE 3* 15 sec.

MODE 4 30 sec.

ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET

MODE 1 0.5 sec.

Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time.

MODE 2* 1 sec.

MODE 3 2 sec.

MODE 4 3 sec.

MODE 5 0 sec.

ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET

MODE 1 0.5 sec.

Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time.MODE 2 1 sec.

MODE 3 2 sec.

MODE 4* 3 sec.

R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET

MODE 1* Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors.

MODE 2Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door only.

Monitor item[Unit]

Description

REQ SW-DR[On/Off]

The switch status input from request switch (driver side)

REQ SW-AS[On/Off]

The switch status input from front request switch (passenger side)

PUSH SW[On/Off]

The switch status input from push-button ignition switch

ACC RLY-F/B[On/Off]

NOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

KEY SW-SLOT[On/Off]

Key switch status input from key slot



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

ACTIVE TEST

BATTERY SAVER

BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000004249005

WORK SUPPORT

*: Factory setting

DATA MONITOR

DOOR SW-DR[On/Off]

The switch status input from driver side door switch

DOOR SW-AS[On/Off]

The switch status input from passenger side door switch

DOOR SW-RR[On/Off]


DOOR SW- RL[On/Off]

DOOR SW-BK[On/Off]

CDL LOCK SW[On/Off]

Lock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link

CDL UNLOCK SW[On/Off]

Unlock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link

KEY CYL LK-SW[On/Off]

Lock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link

KEY CYL UN-SW[On/Off]

Unlock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link

TRNK/HAT MNTR[On/Off]

The switch status input from trunk room lamp switch

RKE-LOCK[On/Off]

Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver

RKE-UNLOCK[On/Off]

Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver

Monitor item[Unit]

Description

Test item Operation Description

INT LAMPOn

Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn map lamp ON (Map lamp switch is in DOOR position).

Off Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn map lamp OFF.

STEP LAMP TESTOn Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn step lamp ON.

Off Stops the step lamp control signal to turn step lamp OFF.

LUGGAGE LAMP TESTOn Outputs the trunk room lamp control signal to turn the trunk room lamp ON.

Off Stops the trunk room lamp control signal to turn the trunk room lamp OFF.

Service item Setting item Setting

BATTERY SAVER SETOn* With the exterior lamp battery saver function

Off Without the exterior lamp battery saver function

ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SETOn* With the interior room lamp battery saver function

Off Without the interior room lamp battery saver function

ROOM LAMP TIMER SETMODE 1* 30 min. Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating

time. MODE 2 60 min.


ACTIVE TEST

*: Each lamp switch is in ON position.

Monitor item[Unit]

Description

REQ SW-DR[On/Off]

The switch status input from request switch (driver side)

REQ SW-AS[On/Off]

The switch status input from front request switch (passenger side)

REQ SW-RR[On/Off] NOTE:

The item is indicated, but not monitored.REQ SW-RL[On/Off]

PUSH SW[On/Off]

The switch status input from push-button ignition switch

ACC RLY-F/B[On/Off]


KEY SW-SLOT[On/Off]

Key switch status input from key slot

UNLK SEN-DR[On/Off]

Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor

DOOR SW-DR[On/Off]

The switch status input driver side front door switch

DOOR SW-AS[On/Off]

The switch status input from passenger side door switch

DOOR SW-RR[On/Off]


DOOR SW- RL[On/Off]

DOOR SW-BK[On/Off]

CDL LOCK SW[On/Off]

Lock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link

CDL UNLOCK SW[On/Off]

Unlock switch status received from the door lock and unlock switch by power window switch serial link

KEY CYL LK-SW[On/Off]

Lock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link

KEY CYL UN-SW[On/Off]

Unlock switch status received from key cylinder switch by power window switch serial link

TRNK/HAT MNTR[On/Off]

The switch status input from trunk room lamp switch

RKE-LOCK[On/Off]

Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver

RKE-UNLOCK[On/Off]

Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver

Test item Operation Description

BATTERY SAVEROff Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamp OFF.

On Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamp ON.*


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

I

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISPOWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITBCM

BCM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004684064

1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.

Is the fuse fusing?YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is

blown.NO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connectors.3. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair harness or connector.

Signal name Fuse and fusible link No.

Battery power supplyK

10

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (−)

BCM

GroundConnector Terminal

M118 1Battery voltage

M119 11

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 13 Existed


INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Description INFOID:0000000004249007

Provides the interior room lamp power supply. Also cuts the power supply when the interior room lamp batterysaver activating.

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004249008

1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY FUNCTION

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Turn each interior room lamp ON.- Map lamp- Step lamp- Vanity mirror lamp- Trunk room lamp3. Select "BATTERY SAVER" of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.4. With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.

Does the interior room lamp turn ON/OFF?YES >> Interior room lamp power supply circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to INL-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004249009

1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Select “BATTERY SAVER” of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.3. With operating the test item, check voltage between BCM harness connector and the ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace BCM.

2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the following connectors.- Map lamp- Vanity mirror lamp (LH)- Vanity mirror lamp (RH)- Trunk room lamp- Step lamp (driver side)- Step lamp (passenger side)3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and each interior room lamp harness connector.

Off : Interior room lamp OFFOn : Interior room lamp ON

TerminalsTest item

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

BCM

Ground

BATTERY SAVERConnector Terminal

M119 4

Off 0 V

OnBatteryvoltage



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Does continuity exist?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.NO >> Check that each interior room lamp has no internal short circuit.

BCM Each interior room lampContinuity

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

M119 4

Map lamp R15 1

Existed

Vanity mirror lamp (LH)

R12 2

Vanity mirror lamp (RH)

R13 2

Trunk room lamp B47 1

Step lamp(driver side)

D12 1

Step lamp(passenger side)

D42 1

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 4 Not existed


INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT


Controls each interior room lamp (ground side) by PWM signal.NOTE:PWM signal control period is approximately 250 Hz (in the gradual brightening/dimming).


CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.• Interior room lamp power supply• Map lamp bulb

1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Switch the map lamp switch to DOOR.2. Turn the ignition switch ON.3. Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.4. With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dim-

ming).

Does the interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming)?YES >> Interior room lamp control circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to INL-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Remove all the bulbs of map lamp.3. Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.4. With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 2.Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM.

2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and map lamp connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and map lamp harness connector.

Does continuity exist?

On : Interior room lamp gradual brighteningOff : Interior room lamp gradual dimming

BCM

Ground

Test itemContinuity

Connector Terminal INT LAMP

M119 19On Existed

Off Not existed

BCM Map lampContinuity


M119 19 R15 2 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

YES >> Replace the map lamp.NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and map lamp connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.NO >> Replace BCM.

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 19 Not existed


STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
STEP LAMP CIRCUIT


Controls the step lamp (ground side) to turn the step lamp ON and OFF.


CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.• Interior room lamp power supply• Step lamp bulb

1.CHECK STEP LAMP OPERATION

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Select "STEP LAMP TEST" of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.3. With operating the test items, check that step lamp turns ON/OFF.

Does the step lamp turn ON/OFF?YES >> Step lamp circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to INL-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK STEP LAMP OUTPUT

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Remove the step lamp bulbs (driver side and passenger side).3. Turn the ignition switch ON.4. Select “STEP LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.5. With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.


2.CHECK STEP LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector, and step lamp connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and step lamp harness connector.

On : Step lamp ONOff : Step lamp OFF

BCM

Ground

Test item

ContinuityConnector Terminal

STEP LAMP TEST

M119 7On Existed

Off Not existed

BCM Step lampContinuity


M119 7

Driver side

D12 2

ExistedPassen-ger side

D42 2


STEP LAMP CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Does continuity exist?YES >> Replace the step lamp.NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

3.CHECK STEP LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.


BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M119 7 Not existed


TRUNK ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT


Controls the trunk room lamp (ground side) to turn the trunk room lamp ON and OFF.


CAUTION: Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.• Interior room lamp power supply• Trunk room lamp bulb

1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP OPERATION

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Select “LUGGAGE LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.3. With operating the test items, check that trunk room lamp turns ON/OFF.

Does the trunk room lamp turn ON/OFF?YES >> Trunk room lamp circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to INL-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP OUTPUT

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Remove trunk room lamp bulb.3. Turn the ignition switch ON.4. Select “LUGGAGE LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.5. With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.


2.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and trunk room lamp connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and trunk room lamp harness connector.

Does continuity exist?YES >> Replace the trunk room lamp.

On : Trunk room lamp ONOff : Trunk room lamp OFF

BCM

Ground

Test item


LUGGAGE LAMP TEST

M120 30On Existed

Off Not existed

BCM Trunk room lampContinuity


M120 30 B47 2 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.

3.CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and trunk room lamp connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.


BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M120 30 Not existed


PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT


Provides the power supply and the ground to control the push-button ignition switch illumination.


1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Select “ENGINE SW ILLUMI” of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item.3. With operating the test items, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF

Does the push-button ignition switch illumination turn ON/OFF?YES >> Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit is normal.NO >> Refer to INL-28, "Diagnosis Procedure".


1.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCHING OPERATION

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. With operating the lighting switch, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF

Does the push-button ignition switch illumination turn ON/OFF?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and the push-button ignition switch connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the push-button ignition switch harness connector.

Does the continuity exist?YES >> Replace BCM.NO >> Repair the harness or the connector.

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT

CONSULT-III ACTIVE TEST1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Select “ENGINE SW ILLUMI” of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item.3. With operating the test item, check voltage between BCM harness connector and the ground.

On : Push-button ignition switch illumination ONOff : Push-button ignition switch illumination OFF

Condition Push-button ignition switch illumination

• Ignition switch ON• Lighting switch 1ST

ON

• Ignition switch OFF• Lighting switch OFF• Driver door LOCK

OFF

BCM Push-button ignition switchContinuity


M119 14 M50 2 Existed



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 5.

4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and the push-button ignition switch connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the push-button ignition switch harness connector.

Does the continuity exist?YES >> Replace the push-button ignition switch.NO >> Repair the harness or the connector.

5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect BCM connector and the push-button ignition switch connector.3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the ground.

Does the continuity exist?YES >> Repair the harness or the connector.NO >> Replace BCM.

TerminalsTest item

Voltage(Approx.)

(+) (–)

BCM

Ground

ENGINE SW ILLUMIConnector Terminal

M123 133ON 5 V

OFF 0 V

BCM Push-button ignition switchContinuity


M123 133 M50 3 Existed

BCM

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M123 133 Not existed



Wiring Diagram - INTERIOR ROOM LAMP - INFOID:0000000004249022

JCLWM2705GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2706GB


JCLWM2707GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2708GB


JCLWM2709GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2710GB


JCLWM2711GB


ILLUMINATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

ILLUMINATION

Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION - INFOID:0000000004249023

JCLWM2712GB


ILLUMINATION
JCLWM2713GB


ILLUMINATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2714GB


ILLUMINATION
JCLWM2715GB


ILLUMINATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2716GB


ILLUMINATION
JCLWM2717GB


ILLUMINATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2718GB


ILLUMINATION
JCLWM2719GB


ILLUMINATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCLWM2720GB


ILLUMINATION
JCLWM2721GB


BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

I

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONBCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

Reference Value INFOID:0000000004684065

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

FR WIPER HIOther than front wiper switch HI Off

Front wiper switch HI On

FR WIPER LOWOther than front wiper switch LO Off

Front wiper switch LO On

FR WASHER SWFront washer switch OFF Off

Front washer switch ON On

FR WIPER INTOther than front wiper switch INT Off

Front wiper switch INT On

FR WIPER STOPFront wiper is not in STOP position Off

Front wiper is in STOP position On

INT VOLUME Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7Wiper intermittent dial

position

TURN SIGNAL ROther than turn signal switch RH Off

Turn signal switch RH On

TURN SIGNAL LOther than turn signal switch LH Off

Turn signal switch LH On

TAIL LAMP SWOther than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Off

Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND On

HI BEAM SWOther than lighting switch HI Off

Lighting switch HI On

HEAD LAMP SW 1Other than lighting switch 2ND Off

Lighting switch 2ND On

HEAD LAMP SW 2Other than lighting switch 2ND Off

Lighting switch 2ND On

PASSING SWOther than lighting switch PASS Off

Lighting switch PASS On

AUTO LIGHT SWOther than lighting switch AUTO Off

Lighting switch AUTO On

FR FOG SWFront fog lamp switch OFF Off

Front fog lamp switch ON On

RR FOG SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-DRDriver door closed Off

Driver door opened On

DOOR SW-ASPassenger door closed Off

Passenger door opened On

DOOR SW-RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off


DOOR SW-RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

DOOR SW-BKNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CDL LOCK SWOther than power door lock switch LOCK Off

Power door lock switch LOCK On

CDL UNLOCK SWOther than power door lock switch UNLOCK Off

Power door lock switch UNLOCK On

KEY CYL LK-SWOther than driver door key cylinder LOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder LOCK position On

KEY CYL UN-SWOther than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position Off

Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position On

KEY CYL SW-TRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

HAZARD SWHazard switch is OFF Off

Hazard switch is ON On

REAR DEF SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

H/L WASH SWNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

TR CANCEL SWTrunk lid opener cancel switch OFF Off

Trunk lid opener cancel switch ON On

TR/BD OPEN SWTrunk lid opener switch OFF Off

While the trunk lid opener switch is turned ON On

TRNK/HAT MNTRTrunk lid closed Off

Trunk lid opened On

RKE-LOCKLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

LOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-UNLOCKUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-TR/BDTRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

TRUNK OPEN button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-PANICPANIC button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

PANIC button of the Intelligent Key is pressed On

RKE-P/W OPENUNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed Off

UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held On

RKE-MODE CHG

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is not pressed and held simulta-neously

Off

LOCK/UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key is pressed and held simultaneously On

OPTICAL SENSORBright outside of the vehicle Close to 5 V

Dark outside of the vehicle Close to 0 V

REQ SW -DRDriver door request switch is not pressed Off

Driver door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -ASPassenger door request switch is not pressed Off

Passenger door request switch is pressed On

REQ SW -RRNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

REQ SW -RLNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

REQ SW -BD/TRTrunk lid opener request switch is not pressed Off

Trunk lid opener request switch is pressed On

PUSH SWPush-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed On

IGN RLY2 -F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off

Ignition switch in ON position On

ACC RLY -F/BNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

CLUCH SWThe clutch pedal is not depressed Off

The clutch pedal is depressed On

BRAKE SW 1

The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown Off

The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse is nor-mal

On

BRAKE SW 2The brake pedal is not depressed Off

The brake pedal is depressed On

DETE/CANCL SW

• Selector lever in P position (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in any position other than P (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

On

SFT PN/N SWSelector lever in any position other than P and N Off

Selector lever in P or N position On

S/L -LOCKSteering is unlocked Off

Steering is locked On

S/L -UNLOCKSteering is locked Off

Steering is unlocked On

S/L RELAY-F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off


UNLK SEN -DRDriver door is unlocked Off

Driver door is locked On

PUSH SW -IPDMPush-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed Off

Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed On

IGN RLY1 -F/BIgnition switch in OFF or ACC position Off


DETE SW -IPDMSelector lever in any position other than P Off

Selector lever in P position On

SFT PN -IPDM

• Selector lever in any position other than P and N (Except M/T models)• The clutch pedal is not depressed (M/T models)

Off

• Selector lever in P or N position• The clutch pedal is depressed

On

SFT P -METSelector lever in any position other than P Off

Selector lever in P position On

SFT N -METSelector lever in any position other than N Off

Selector lever in N position On



ENGINE STATE

Engine stopped Stop

While the engine stalls Stall

At engine cranking Crank

Engine running Run

S/L LOCK-IPDMSteering is unlocked Off

Steering is locked On

S/L UNLK-IPDMSteering is locked Off

Steering is unlocked On

S/L RELAY-REQ

Steering lock system is not the LOCK condition and the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

Off

Steering lock system are not the LOCK condition or the changing condition from LOCK to UNLOCK

On

VEH SPEED 1 While drivingEquivalent to speed-

ometer reading

VEH SPEED 2 While drivingEquivalent to speed-

ometer reading

DOOR STAT-DR

Driver door is locked LOCK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) READY

Driver door is unlocked UNLOCK

DOOR STAT-AS

Passenger door is locked LOCK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds) READY

Passenger door is unlocked UNLOCK

ID OK FLAGSteering is locked Reset

Steering is unlocked Set

PRMT ENG STRTThe engine start is prohibited Reset

The engine start is permitted Set

PRMT RKE STRTNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Reset

KEY SW -SLOTThe Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot Off

The Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot On

RKE OPE COUN1 During the operation of the Intelligent KeyOperation frequency of

the Intelligent Key

RKE OPE COUN2NOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

—

CONFRM ID ALL

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID4

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID3

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM.

Done




C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

CONFIRM ID2

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key ID reg-istered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Done

CONFIRM ID1

The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID regis-tered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM.

Done

TP 4The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of fourth Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 3The ID of third Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of third Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 2The ID of second Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of second Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

TP 1The ID of first Intelligent Key is not registered to BCM Yet

The ID of first Intelligent Key is registered to BCM Done

AIR PRESS FL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front LH

tire

AIR PRESS FR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of front RH

tire

AIR PRESS RR Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear RH

tire

AIR PRESS RL Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)Air pressure of rear LH

tire

ID REGST FL1ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST FR1ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RR1ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

ID REGST RL1ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered Done

ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered Yet

WARNING LAMPTire pressure indicator OFF Off

Tire pressure indicator ON On

BUZZERTire pressure warning alarm is not sounding Off

Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding On



TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JPMIA0062ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Terminal No.(Wire color)

Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)Signal nameInput/ Output+ –

1(W)

Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

2(Y)

GroundP/W power supply (BAT)

Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V

3(O)

GroundP/W power supply (RAP)

Output Ignition switch ON 12 V

4(LG)

GroundInterior room lamp power supply

Output

Interior room lamp battery saver is activated.(Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)

0 V

Interior room lamp battery saver is not acti-vated.(Outputs the interior room lamp power sup-ply)

12 V

5(P)

GroundPassenger door UN-LOCK

OutputPassenger door

UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-vated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK (Ac-tuator is not activated)

0 V

7(SB)

Ground Step lamp Output Step lampON 0 V

OFF 12 V

8(V)

GroundAll doors, fuel lid LOCK

OutputAll doors, fuel lid

LOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than LOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

9(G)

GroundDriver door, fuel lid UNLOCK

OutputDriver door, fuel lid

UNLOCK(Actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than UNLOCK(Actuator is not activated)

0 V

11(R)


13(B)

Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0 V

14(W)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination ground

Output Tail lamp

OFF 0 V

ON

NOTE:When the illumination brighten-

ing/dimming level is in the neutral position.

15(O)

Ground ACC indicator lamp Output Ignition switch

OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated)

Battery voltage

ACC 0 V

JSNIA0010GB


17(W)

GroundTurn signal RH (Front)

OutputIgnition switch ON

Turn signal switch OFF 0 V

Turn signal switch RH

6.5 V

18(O)

Ground Turn signal LH (Front) OutputIgnition switch ON


Turn signal switch LH

6.5 V

19(V)

GroundRoom lamp timer control

OutputInterior room lamp

OFF 12 V

ON 0 V

20(V)

Ground Turn signal RH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

23(L)

Ground Trunk lid open Output Trunk lid

OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is activated)

12 V

Other than OPEN(Trunk lid opener actuator is not activated)

0 V

25(Y)

Ground Turn signal LH (Rear) OutputIgnition switch ON



6.5 V

30(P)

Ground Trunk room lamp OutputTrunk room lamp

ON 0 V

OFF 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E

PKID0926E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

34(SB)

GroundTrunk room antenna (−)

OutputIgnition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the passenger compart-ment

When Intelligent Key is not in the passenger compart-ment

35(V)

GroundTrunk room antenna (+)




38(B)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (−)

Output

When the trunk lid opener re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


39(W)

GroundRear bumper anten-na (+)

Output

When the trunk lid opener re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



47(Y)

GroundIgnition relay (IPDM E/R) control

Output Ignition switchOFF or ACC 12 V

ON 0 V

50(R)

GroundTrunk room lamp switch

InputTrunk room lamp switch

OFF (Trunk lid is closed)

11.8 V

ON (Trunk lid is opened) 0 V

52(SB)

Ground Starter relay control Output

Ignition switch ON (A/T mod-els)

When selector lever is in P or N position

12 V

When selector lever is not in P or N position

0 V

Ignition switch ON (M/T mod-els)

When the clutch pedal is depressed

Battery voltage

When the clutch pedal is not depressed

0 V

61(SB)

GroundTrunk lid opener re-quest switch

InputTrunk lid open-er request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

64(L)

GroundIntelligent Key warn-ing buzzer (Engine room)

OutputIntelligent Key warning buzzer (Engine room)

Sounding 0 V

Not sounding 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

67(GR)

GroundTrunk lid opener switch

InputTrunk lid open-er switch

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed

11.8 V

72(R)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (−) (Center console)




73(G)

GroundRoom antenna 2 (+) (Center console)





Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


74(SB)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (−)

Output

When the pas-senger door re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



75(BR)

GroundPassenger door an-tenna (+)

Output

When the pas-senger door re-quest switch is operated with ignition switch OFF



76(V)

GroundDriver door antenna (−)

Output

When the driv-er door request switch is oper-ated with igni-tion switch OFF




Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

77(LG)

GroundDriver door antenna (+)

Output

When the driv-er door request switch is oper-ated with igni-tion switch OFF



78(Y)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (−) (Instrument panel)




79(BR)

GroundRoom antenna 1 (+) (Instrument panel)





Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB

JMKIA0062GB

JMKIA0063GB


80(GR)

GroundNATS antenna amp (Built in key slot)

Input/Output

During waitingIgnition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelli-gent Key into the key slot.

Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should

move.

81(W)

GroundNATS antenna amp (Built in key slot)

Input/Output

During waitingIgnition switch is pressed while inserting the Intelli-gent Key into the key slot.

Just after pressing ignition switch. Pointer of tester should

move.

82(R)

GroundIgnition relay [Fuse block (J/B)] control


ON 12 V

83(Y)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver communica-tion

Input/Output

During waiting

When operating either button on the Intelli-gent Key

87(Y)

GroundCombination switch INPUT 5

InputCombination switch

All switches OFF(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.4 V

Front fog lamp switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0064GB

JMKIA0065GB

JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

88(O)




1.4 V

Lighting switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3

1.3 V

89(BR)

GroundPush-button ignition switch (Push switch)

InputPush-button ig-nition switch (push switch)

Pressed 0 V

Not pressed Battery voltage

90(P)

Ground CAN-LInput/ Output

— —

91(L)

Ground CAN-HInput/ Output

— —

92(LG)

Ground Key slot illumination OutputKey slot illumi-nation

OFF 0 V

Blinking

6.5 V

ON 12 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0015GB


93(Y)

Ground ON indicator lamp Output Ignition switch

OFF (LOCK indicator is not illuminated)

Battery voltage

ON 0 V

95(O)

Ground ACC relay control Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 12 V

96(GR)

GroundA/T shift selector (De-tention switch) power supply

Output — 12 V

97(L)

GroundSteering lock condi-tion No. 1

Input Steering lockLOCK status 0 V

UNLOCK status 12 V

98(P)

GroundSteering lock condi-tion No. 2

Input Steering lockLOCK status 12 V

UNLOCK status 0 V

99(R)

Ground

Selector lever P posi-tion switch

Input

Selector leverP position 0 V

Any position other than P 12 V

ASCD clutch switch (M/T models without ICC)

ASCD clutch switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

12 V

ICC clutch switch (M/T models with ICC)

ICC clutch switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

12 V

100(Y)

GroundPassenger door re-quest switch

InputPassenger door request switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

101(P)

GroundDriver door request switch

InputDriver door re-quest switch

ON (Pressed) 0 V

OFF (Not pressed)

1.0 V

102(O)

GroundBlower fan motor re-lay control


ON 12 V

103(LG)

GroundRemote keyless entry receiver power sup-ply

Output Ignition switch OFF 12 V

106(W)

GroundSteering lock unit power supply


ON 0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0016GB

JPMIA0016GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

107(LG)


Input

Combination switch(Wiper intermit-tent dial 4)

All switches OFF

1.4 V


1.3 V


1.3 V

Front wiper switch LO

1.3 V

Front washer switch ON

1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0039GB


108(R)




1.4 V

Lighting switch AUTO(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V

Lighting switch 1ST(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

1.3 V


1.3 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0039GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

109(W)


Input


All switches OFF

1.4 V

Lighting switch PASS

1.3 V

Lighting switch 2ND

1.3 V

Front wiper switch INT

1.3 V

Front wiper switch HI

1.3 V

110(G)

Ground Hazard switch Input Hazard switch

ON 0 V

OFF

1.1 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0041GB

JPMIA0037GB

JPMIA0036GB

JPMIA0038GB

JPMIA0040GB

JPMIA0012GB


111(Y)

GroundSteering lock unit communication

Input/Output

Steering lock

LOCK status 12 V

LOCK or UNLOCK

For 15 seconds after UN-LOCK

12 V

15 seconds or later after UNLOCK

0 V

113(O)

Ground Optical sensor InputIgnition switch ON

When bright outside of the vehicle

Close to 5 V

When dark outside of the vehicle

Close to 0 V

114(R)

GroundClutch interlock switch

InputClutch interlock switch

OFF (Clutch pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Clutch pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

116(SB)

Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Input — Battery voltage

118(BR)

Ground

Stop lamp switch 2 (Without ICC)

Input

Stop lamp switch

OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed)

0 V

ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed)

Battery voltage

Stop lamp switch 2 (With ICC)

Stop lamp switch OFF (Brake pedal is not depressed) and ICC brake hold relay OFF

0 V

Stop lamp switch ON (Brake pedal is de-pressed) or ICC brake hold relay ON

Battery voltage

119(SB)

GroundDriver side door lock assembly (Unlock sensor)

Input Driver door

LOCK status(Unlock sensor switch OFF)

1.1 V

UNLOCK status(Unlock switch sensor ON)

0 V

121(SB)

Ground Key slot switch Input

When the Intelligent Key is inserted into key slot

12 V

When the Intelligent Key is not inserted into key slot

0 V

123(W)

Ground IGN feedback Input Ignition switchOFF or ACC 0 V

ON Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JMKIA0066GB

JPMIA0012GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

124(LG)

GroundPassenger door switch

InputPassenger door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

129(O)

GroundTrunk lid opener can-cel switch

InputTrunk lid open-er cancel switch

CANCEL

1.1 V

ON 0 V

132(V)

GroundPower window switch communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

10.2 V

Ignition switch OFF or ACC 12 V

133(L)

GroundPush-button ignition switch illumination

OutputPush-button ig-nition switch il-lumination

ON (Tail lamps OFF) 9.5 V

ON (Tail lamps ON)

NOTE:The pulse width of this wave is

varied by the illumination bright-ening/dimming level.

OFF 0 V

134(LG)

Ground LOCK indicator lamp OutputLOCK indicator lamp

OFF Battery voltage

ON 0 V

137(O)

GroundReceiver and sensor ground

Input Ignition switch ON 0 V

138(V)

GroundReceiver and sensor power supply

Output Ignition switchOFF 0 V

ACC or ON 5.0 V


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0011GB

JPMIA0012GB

JPMIA0013GB

JPMIA0159GB


139(L)

GroundTire pressure receiv-er communication

Input/Output

Ignition switch ON

Standby state

When receiving the signal from the transmitter

140(GR)

GroundSelector lever P/N position (A/T models)

Input Selector leverP or N position 12 V

Except P and N positions 0 V

141(R)

Ground Security indicator OutputSecurity indica-tor

ON 0 V

Blinking

11.3 V

OFF 12 V

142(BR)

GroundCombination switch OUTPUT 5

Output


All switches OFF 0 V

Lighting switch 1ST

10.7 V

Lighting switch HI

Lighting switch 2ND


143(V)


OutputCombination switch


0 V

Front wiper switch HI(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V

Any of the conditions be-low with all switches OFF• Wiper intermittent dial 1• Wiper intermittent dial 2• Wiper intermittent dial 3• Wiper intermittent dial 6• Wiper intermittent dial 7


Description

ConditionValue


OCC3881D

OCC3880D

JPMIA0014GB

JPMIA0031GB

JPMIA0032GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

144(G)


OutputCombination switch


0 V

Front washer switch ON(Wiper intermittent dial 4)

10.7 V


145(L)


Output



Front wiper switch INT

10.7 V

Front wiper switch LO

Lighting switch AUTO

146(SB)


Output



Front fog lamp switch ON

10.7 V

Lighting switch 2ND

Lighting switch PASS


149(W)

GroundTire pressure warning check switch

Input — 12 V

150(R)

Ground Driver door switch InputDriver door switch

OFF (Door close)

11.8 V

ON (Door open) 0 V

151(G)

GroundRear window defog-ger relay control

OutputRear window defogger

Active 0 V

Not activated Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0033GB

JPMIA0034GB

JPMIA0035GB

JPMIA0011GB


Wiring Diagram - BCM - INFOID:0000000004684066

JCMWM3046GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCMWM3047GB


JCMWM3048GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCMWM3049GB


JCMWM3050GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Fail-safe INFOID:0000000004684067

FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTCBCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.

JCMWM3051GB


Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

B2195: ANTI SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED Inhibit steering lockWhen normal vehicle speed signals are received from ABS actua-tor and electric unit (control unit) for 500 ms

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Starter control relay signal• Starter relay status signal

B2601: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consis-tent• Selector lever P position switch signal• P range signal (CAN)

B2602: SHIFT POSITION Inhibit steering lock

5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are ful-filled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more

B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Ignition switch is in the ON position• Selector lever P position switch signal: Except P position (battery

voltage)• Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)

B2604: PNP SW Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P and N position (battery volt-

age)- P range signal or N range signal (CAN): ON• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- P range signal and N range signal (CAN): OFF

B2605: PNP SW Inhibit steering lock

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 V)- Interlock/PNP switch signal (CAN): OFF• Status 2- Ignition switch is in the ON position- Selector lever P/N position signal: P or N position (battery volt-

age)- PNP switch signal (CAN): ON

B2606: S/L RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status be-comes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

HIGH FLASHER OPERATIONBCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status by the current value.BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signallamp operating.NOTE:The blinking speed is normal while activating the hazard warning lamp.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004684068

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prioritychart.

B2607: S/L RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following CAN signal communication status has becomes consistent• Steering lock relay signal (Request signal)• Steering lock relay signal (Condition signal)

B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent• Starter motor relay control signal• Starter relay status signal (CAN)

B2609: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When the following steering lock conditions agree• BCM steering lock control status• Steering lock condition No. 1 signal status• Steering lock condition No. 2 signal status

B260A: IGNITION RELAY Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following conditions are fulfilled• IGN relay (IPDM E/R) control signal: OFF (Battery voltage)• Ignition ON signal (CAN to IPDM E/R): OFF (Request signal)• Ignition ON signal (CAN from IPDM E/R): OFF (Condition signal)

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOSTMaintains the power supply position attained at the time of DTC detection

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Power position changes to ACC• Receives engine status signal (CAN)

B2612: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled• Steering lock unit status signal (CAN) is received normally• The BCM steering lock control status matches the steering lock

status recognized by the steering lock unit status signal (CAN from IPDM E/R)

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the starter motor relay control inside BCM becomes normal

B2618: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control inside BCM be-comes normal

B2619: BCM Inhibit engine cranking1 second after the steering lock unit power supply output control in-side BCM becomes normal

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE Inhibit engine cranking BCM initialization

B26E8: CLUTCH SW Inhibit engine cranking

When any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled• Status 1- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): ON- Clutch interlock switch signal: OFF (0 V)• Status 2- Clutch switch signal (CAN from ECM): OFF- Clutch interlock switch signal: ON (Battery voltage)

B26E9: S/L STATUS• Inhibit engine cranking• Inhibit steering lock

When BCM transmits the LOCK request signal to steering lock unit, and receives LOCK response signal from steering lock unit, the fol-lowing conditions are fulfilled• Steering condition No. 1 signal: LOCK (0 V)• Steering condition No. 2 signal: LOCK (Battery voltage)

Display contents of CONSULT Fail-safe Cancellation


Priority DTC

1 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE

2• U1000: CAN COMM• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

3

• B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP• B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY• B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM• B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM• B2195: ANTI SCANNING

4

• B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L• B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM• B2553: IGNITION RELAY• B2555: STOP LAMP • B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B2557: VEHICLE SPEED• B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY• B2601: SHIFT POSITION• B2602: SHIFT POSITION• B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS• B2604: PNP SW• B2605: PNP SW• B2606: S/L RELAY• B2607: S/L RELAY• B2608: STARTER RELAY• B2609: S/L STATUS• B260A: IGNITION RELAY• B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT• B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST• B2612: S/L STATUS• B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC• B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC• B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC• B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC• B2618: BCM• B2619: BCM• B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW• B261E: VEHICLE TYPE• B26E8: CLUTCH SW• B26E9: S/L STATUS• B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION• C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR• U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

DTC Index INFOID:0000000004684069

NOTE:The details of time display are as follows.• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to INL-14, "COM-MON ITEM : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".

5

• C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL• C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR• C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR• C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL• C1708: [NO DATA] FL• C1709: [NO DATA] FR• C1710: [NO DATA] RR• C1711: [NO DATA] RL• C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL• C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR• C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR• C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL• C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL• C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR• C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR• C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL• C1720: [CODE ERR] FL• C1721: [CODE ERR] FR• C1722: [CODE ERR] RR• C1723: [CODE ERR] RL• C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL• C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR• C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR• C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL• C1734: CONTROL UNIT

6• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA • B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA

Priority DTC

CONSULT display Fail-safe

Freeze Frame Data•Vehicle Speed•Odo/Trip Meter

•Vehicle condition

Intelligent Key warning lamp ON

Tire pressure monitor warning

lamp ON

Refer-ence page

No DTC is detected.further testingmay be required.

— — — — —

U1000: CAN COMM — — — — BCS-35

U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN) — — — — BCS-36

U0415: VEHICLE SPEED SIG — — — — BCS-37

B2013: ID DISCORD BCM-S/L × × — — SEC-55

B2014: CHAIN OF S/L-BCM × × — — SEC-56

B2190: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — — SEC-47

B2191: DIFFERENCE OF KEY × — — — SEC-50

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-51

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — — SEC-53

B2195: ANTI SCANNING × — — — SEC-54

B2553: IGNITION RELAY — × — — PCS-48

B2555: STOP LAMP — × — — SEC-59


B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — SEC-61

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED × × × — SEC-63

B2560: STARTER CONT RELAY × × × — SEC-64

B2562: LOW VOLTAGE — × — — BCS-38

B2601: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-65

B2602: SHIFT POSITION × × × — SEC-68

B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS × × × — SEC-70

B2604: PNP SW × × × — SEC-73

B2605: PNP SW × × × — SEC-75

B2606: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-77

B2607: S/L RELAY × × × — SEC-78

B2608: STARTER RELAY × × × — SEC-80

B2609: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-82

B260A: IGNITION RELAY × × × — PCS-50

B260B: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-86

B260C: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-87

B260D: STEERING LOCK UNIT — × × — SEC-88

B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST × × × — SEC-89

B2612: S/L STATUS × × × — SEC-94

B2614: ACC RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-52

B2615: BLOWER RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-54

B2616: IGN RELAY CIRC — × × — PCS-56

B2617: STARTER RELAY CIRC × × × — SEC-98

B2618: BCM × × × — PCS-58

B2619: BCM × × × — SEC-100

B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW — × × — PCS-59

B261E: VEHICLE TYPE × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-101

B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA — × — — DLK-55



B26E8: CLUTCH SW × × × — SEC-90

B26E9: S/L STATUS × × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-92

B26EA: KEY REGISTRATION — × × (Turn ON for 15 seconds)

— SEC-93

C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL — — — ×

WT-17C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR — — — ×

C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR — — — ×

C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL — — — ×






lamp ON

Refer-ence page



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

C1708: [NO DATA] FL — — — ×

WT-19C1709: [NO DATA] FR — — — ×

C1710: [NO DATA] RR — — — ×

C1711: [NO DATA] RL — — — ×

C1712: [CHECKSUM ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-21C1713: [CHECKSUM ERR] FR — — — ×

C1714: [CHECKSUM ERR] RR — — — ×

C1715: [CHECKSUM ERR] RL — — — ×

C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-24C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR — — — ×

C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR — — — ×

C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL — — — ×

C1720: [CODE ERR] FL — — — ×

WT-26C1721: [CODE ERR] FR — — — ×

C1722: [CODE ERR] RR — — — ×

C1723: [CODE ERR] RL — — — ×

C1724: [BATT VOLT LOW] FL — — — ×

WT-29C1725: [BATT VOLT LOW] FR — — — ×

C1726: [BATT VOLT LOW] RR — — — ×

C1727: [BATT VOLT LOW] RL — — — ×

C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR — — — × WT-32

C1734: CONTROL UNIT — — — × WT-33






lamp ON

Refer-ence page


COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER


VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOLRefer to MWI-82, "Reference Value".

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JSNIA0457ZZ


Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)+ – Signal name

Input/Output

1(V)

Ground Battery power supply InputIgnition switch OFF

— Battery voltage

2(LG)

GroundCommunication signal (METER→ AMP.)


—

3(GR)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP.→ METER)

InputIgnition switch ON

—

5(B)

Ground Ground —Ignition switch ON

— 0 V

6(W)

Ground Alternator signal InputIgnition switch ON

Charge warning lamp ON 0 V

Charge warning lamp OFF 12 V

7(LG)

Ground Air bag signal InputIgnition switch ON

Air bag warning lamp ON 4 V

Air bag warning lamp OFF 0 V

10(R)

Ground Security signal InputIgnition switch OFF

Security warning lamp ON 0 V

Security warning lamp OFF 12 V

15(B)


— 0 V

JSNIA0027GB

JSNIA0027GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

16(B)

Ground Meter control switch ground —Ignition switch ON

— 0 V

21(R)

Ground Ignition signal InputIgnition switch ON

— 12 V

22(B)


— 0 V

24(BR)

GroundCommunication signal (LCD→ AMP.)


—

25(Y)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP.→ LCD)


—

26(R)

GroundVehicle speed signal(8-pulse)


Speedometer operated[When vehicle speed is ap-prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)]

NOTE:The maximum voltage varies de-pending on the specification (destination unit).

27(O)

Ground Parking brake switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

Parking brake applied 0 V

Parking brake released

28(LG)

GroundBrake fluid level switch sig-nal


Brake fluid level is normal.

The brake fluid level is low-er than the low level

0 V


Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0028GB

JSNIA0027GB

JSNIA0012GB

JSNIA0007GB

JSNIA0008GB


COMBINATION METER
29(LG)

GroundSeat belt buckle switch sig-nal (driver side)


When driver seat belt is fas-tened

12 V

When driver seat belt is un-fastened

0 V

30(G)

GroundSeat belt buckle switch sig-nal (passenger side)


• When getting in the pas-senger seat

• When passenger seat belt is fastened

12 V


• When passenger seat belt is unfastened

0 V

31(L)

Ground Washer level switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

Washer level switch ON 0 V

Washer level switch OFF 5 V

33(R)

Ground Illumination control signal OutputIgnition switch ON

Lighting switch ON, then operate the illumination control switch.

NOTE:When brightness level is midway

36(LG)

16(B)

Select switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When is pressed 0 V

Other than the above 5 V

37(SB)

16(B)

Enter switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When is pressed 0 V


38(L)

16(B)

Trip A/B reset switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When trip A/B reset switch is pressed

0 V


39(P)

16(B)

Illumination control switch signal (–)


When switch is pressed

0 V


40(O)

16(B)

Illumination control switch signal (+)



0 V



Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0010GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

Wiring Diagram - METER - INFOID:0000000004684071

JCNWM1749GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1750GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCNWM1751GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1752GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCNWM1753GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1754GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCNWM1755GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1756GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

JCNWM1757GB


COMBINATION METER

FAIL SAFECombination meter performs fail-safe operation when unified meter and A/C amp. communication is malfunc-tion.Solution for communication error between the unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter.

JCNWM1758GB


COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I


Refer to MWI-99, "DTC Index".

Function Specifications

Speedometer

Reset to zero by suspending communication.Tachometer

Fuel gauge

Water temperature gauge

Illumination control When suspending communication, change to nighttime mode.

Information display The display turns off by suspending communication.

Buzzer The buzzer turns off by suspending communication.

Warning lamp/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp

The lamp turns on by suspending communication.

VDC OFF indicator lamp

SLIP indicator lamp

Brake warning lamp

CRUISE warning lamp

High beam indicator

The lamp turns off by suspending communication.

Turn signal indicator lamp

Oil pressure warning lamp

Malfunction indicator lamp

A/T CHECK warning lamp

Low tire pressure warning lamp

Key warning lamp

AFS OFF indicator lamp

4WAS warning lamp

Master warning lamp

AWD warning lamp


INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISINTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS

Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004249033

CAUTION:Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT-III before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diag-nosis if any DTC is detected.

Symptom Possible cause Inspection item

All the following lamps do not turn ON.• Map lamp• Trunk room lamp• Step lamp• Vanity mirror lamp

• Harness between BCM and each interior room lamp

• BCM

Interior room lamp power supply circuitRefer to INL-20.

• Interior room lamp does not turn ON even though the door is open.(It turns ON when turning the interior room lamp ON.)

• Interior room lamp does not turn OFF even though the door is closed.

• Harness between BCM and each door switch

• Harness between BCM and each interior room lamp

• BCM

Door switch circuitRefer to DLK-62.

Interior room lamp control circuitRefer to INL-22.

Interior room lamp timer does not activate.(It turns ON/ OFF when the door opens/closes.)

—Check the interior room lamp setting.Refer to INL-16.

Step lamps (driver side and passenger side) do not turn ON.(Map lamp is turned ON.) • Harness between BCM and each

step lamp• BCM

Step lamp circuitRefer to INL-24.Step lamps (driver side and passenger side) do

not turn OFF.(Map lamp is turned OFF.)

• Trunk room lamp does not turn ON.(Bulb is normal.)

• Trunk room lamp does not turn OFF.

• Harness between BCM and trunk room lamp switch

• Harness between BCM and trunk room lamp

• BCM

Trunk room lamp switch circuitRefer to DLK-71.

Trunk room lamp circuitRefer to INL-26.

Push-button ignition switch illumination does not illuminate.

• Harness between BCM and push-button ignition switch

• BCM

Push-button ignition switch illumination circuitRefer to INL-28.

Interior room lamp battery saver does not acti-vate.

—Check the interior room lamp battery saver setting.Refer to INL-17.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

I

PRECAUTIONPRECAUTIONS

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004684074

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used alongwith a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certaintypes of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRSsystem uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one frontair bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of thisService Manual.WARNING:• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in

the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed byan authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.

• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personalinjury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air BagModule, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.

• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in thisService Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-ness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERSWARNING:• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the

ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possiblycausing serious injury.

• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect thebattery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Battery Service INFOID:0000000004684075

Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interfer-ence between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, thewindow slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automaticwindow function will not work with the battery disconnected.


MAP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONMAP LAMP

Exploded View INFOID:0000000004249036

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004249037

Refer to INL-98, "Exploded View" for the map lamp assembly installation/removal.

Replacement INFOID:0000000004249038

CAUTION:• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove the fuse.• Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it.• Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off.• Never leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect

the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.

MAP LAMP BULB1. Insert any appropriate tool into the gap between the lens. Remove the lens.2. Remove the bulb.

1. Map lamp assembly 2. Bulb 3. Lens

JPLIA0059ZZ


VANITY MIRROR LAMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

VANITY MIRROR LAMP





VANITY MIRROR LAMP BULB1. Insert any appropriate tool into the gap between the lens. Remove the lens.2. Remove the bulb.

1. Lens 2. Bulb

JPLIA0061ZZ


CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION





CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION BULB1. Remove the console finisher. Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View".2. Insert any appropriate tool into the gap of the bulb socket. Widen the hook and remove the bulb socket.3. Remove the bulb.

1. Bulb socket 2. Bulb(Share with the ashtray illumination)

A Hook

JPLIA0068ZZ


GLOVE BOX LAMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

GLOVE BOX LAMP





GLOVE BOX LAMP BULB1. Remove the instrument assist lower panel. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.3. Remove the bulb.

1. Bulb 2. Bulb socket

JPLIA0066ZZ


STEP LAMP
STEP LAMP



CAUTION:Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove the fuse.

REMOVAL1. Insert any appropriate tool into the gap between the step lamp and the door trim. Remove the step lamp.2. Disconnect the connector.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.




STEP LAMP BULB1. Remove the step lamp. Refer to INL-102, "Exploded View".2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb.

1. Step lamp case 2. Bulb 3. Lens

A Metal clip

JPLIA0062ZZ


TRUNK ROOM LAMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

M

A

B

NL

N

O

P


I

TRUNK ROOM LAMP



CAUTION:Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove the fuse.

REMOVAL1. Widen the pawl (A). Open the lens (1).2. Remove the bulb.

3. Pressing the pawl (B) to the arrow direction ( ). Pull out thetrunk room lamp.

4. Disconnect the connector.5. Remove the trunk room lamp.





TRUNK ROOM LAMP BULB1. Widen the lens pawl. Open the lens.2. Remove the bulb.

1. Trunk room lamp 2. Bulb

A Pawl (for lens fixing) B. Pawl (for case installation)

JPLIA0065ZZ

SKIB8336J


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Bulb Specifications INFOID:0000000004249051

Item Type Wattage (W)

Push-button ignition switch illumination LED —

Map lamp Wedge 8

Center console indirect illumination(Integrated into the map lamp assembly)

LED —

Vanity mirror lamp — 2

Glove box lamp — 1.4

Cigarette lighter illumination(Shared with ash tray illumination)

— 1.4

Step lamp Wedge 8

Trunk room lamp Wedge 3.4


BODY INTERIOR

C

D

E

SECTION INTA

B

INTERIOR

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

NT

N

O

P

CONTENTS

I

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-NOSES ................................................................ 2

Work Flow .................................................................2Inspection Procedure ................................................4Diagnostic Worksheet ...............................................6

PRECAUTION ............................................... 8

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 8Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...................................................................8Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-tion after Battery Disconnect .....................................8Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ......9Precaution for Battery Service ..................................9Precaution for Work ..................................................9

PREPARATION ...........................................10

PREPARATION ..................................................10Special Service Tools ..............................................10Commercial Service Tools ......................................10

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............11

DOOR FINISHER ...............................................11Exploded View ........................................................11

Removal and Installation .........................................11

BODY SIDE TRIM .............................................14Exploded View .........................................................14Removal and Installation .........................................14

REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER ..................17Exploded View .........................................................17Removal and Installation .........................................17

FLOOR TRIM ....................................................19Exploded View .........................................................19Removal and Installation .........................................19

HEADLINING ....................................................21

NORMAL ROOF ........................................................21NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View ...........................21NORMAL ROOF : Removal and Installation ...........22

SUNROOF ..................................................................23SUNROOF : Exploded View ....................................24SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ....................24

TRUNK ROOM TRIM ........................................27Exploded View .........................................................27Removal and Installation .........................................27

TRUNK LID TRIM ..............................................29Exploded View .........................................................29Removal and Installation .........................................29

INT-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISSQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES


CUSTOMER INTERVIEWInterview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and anycustomer comments. Refer to INT-6, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate theconditions that exist when the noise occurs.• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain

all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is

concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a test drive with the customer.• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics

are provided so that the customer, service adviser, and technician use the same language when describingthe noise.

• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)Squeak characteristics include the light contact / fast movement / brought on by road conditions / hard sur-faces = high-pitched noise / softer surfaces = low-pitched noises / edge to surface = chirping

• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)Creak characteristics include firm contact / slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement / pitchdependent on materials / often brought on by activity.

• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)Rattle characteristics include fast repeated contact / vibration or similar movement / loose parts/missing clipor fastener / incorrect clearance.

• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)Knock characteristics include hollow sounds / sometimes repeating / often brought on by driver action.

• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials / loose components / can be caused by driveraction or road conditions.

• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)Thump characteristics include softer knock / dull sounds often brought on by activity.

• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle / firm contact.

• Often the degree of acceptable noise level varies depending upon the person. A noise that a technician mayjudge as acceptable may be very irritating to a customer.

• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

SBT842



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information onthe Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used toduplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, do the following with the vehicle stopped to helpidentify the source of the noise.1) Close a door.2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.3) Rev the engine.4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the

vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINSAfter verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relatedto the concern or symptom.If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool

(Chassis ear: J-39570, engine ear, and mechanics stethoscope).2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:• Removing the component(s) in the area(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.

Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be brokenor lost during the repair, creating a new noise.

• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.Do not tap or push/pull the component(s) with excessive force, otherwise the noise is eliminated only tempo-rarily.

• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of thenoise.

• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.• Looking for loose components and contact marks.

Refer to INT-4, "Inspection Procedure".

REPAIR THE CAUSE• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the components, if possible.- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape, or ure-

thane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized NISSAN PartsDepartment.

CAUTION:Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.NOTE:Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can beordered separately as needed.URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]Insulates connectors, harness, etc.• 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in)• 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in)• 76884-71L02: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in)INSULATOR (Foam blocks)Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.• 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)• 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)INSULATOR (Light foam block)80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in)FELT CLOTHTAPE


< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.• 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad• 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape rollThe following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.UHMW (TEFLON) TAPEInsulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.SILICONE GREASEUsed in place of UHMW tape that is visible or does not fit. Only lasts a few months.SILICONE SPRAYUsed when grease cannot be applied.DUCT TAPEUsed to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIRAfter repair is complete, test drive the vehicle to confirm that the cause of noise is repaired by test driving thevehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to thenotes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004676913

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.

INSTRUMENT PANELMost incidents are caused by contact and movement between:1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish4. Instrument panel to windshield5. Instrument panel mounting pins6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint

These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or bypressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired byapplying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulatewiring harness.CAUTION:Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, therecheck of repair becomes impossible.

CENTER CONSOLEComponents to check include:1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unitThe instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORSCheck the following items:1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise2. Inside handle escutcheon connection to door finisher3. Wiring harnesses tapping4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stopsTapping, moving the components, or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolatemany of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks fromthe NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.

TRUNKTrunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.In addition check for the following items:



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together4. A loose license plate or bracketMost of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing, or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-ing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLININGNoises in the sunroof / headlining area can often be traced to one of the following items:1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage, or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeakingAgain, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of theseincidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

SEATSWhen isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seatwhen the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of thenoise.Causes of seat noise include:1. Headrest rods and holder2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame3. The rear seatback lock and bracketThese noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the componentor applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOODSome interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is thentransmitted into the passenger compartment.Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:1. Any component mounted to the engine wall2. Components that pass through the engine wall3. Engine wall mounts and connectors4. Loose radiator mounting pins5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment6. Hood striker out of adjustmentThese noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The bestmethod is to secure, move, or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPMor load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, orinsulating the component causing the noise.


Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000004677008

PIIB8741E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

PIIB8742E


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >









Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery DisconnectINFOID:0000000004636008

NOTE:• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion, then disconnect both battery cables.• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both

battery cables.• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.

If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock andcannot be turned.If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-cedure below before starting the repair operation.

OPERATION PROCEDURE1. Connect both battery cables.

NOTE:Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)

3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-nected and the steering wheel can be turned.

4. Perform the necessary repair operation.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

I

5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turnthe push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steeringwheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)

6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004636009

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, coverthe lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.



Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000004636010

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check theiroperation.

• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

PIIB3706J


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATIONPREPARATION

Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004636001

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000004636002

Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)Tool name

Description

(J-39570)Chassis ear

Locates the noise

(J-43980)NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairs the cause of noise

SIIA0993E

SIIA0994E

Tool name Description

Engine ear Locates the noise

Remover tool Removes clips, pawls and metal clips

SIIA0995E

JMKIA3050ZZ


DOOR FINISHER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONDOOR FINISHER



CAUTION:When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.

REMOVAL1. Fully open door window.2. Remove inside handle escutcheon (1) with remover tool (A).

1. Door panel assembly 2. Inside handle escutcheon 3. Door finisher assembly

4. Armrest cap 5. Step lamp 6. Speaker grille

7. Seat memory switch 8. Inside handle

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA2778ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0073GB


DOOR FINISHER
3. Remove bolt (A), located behind the inside handle escutcheon.

4. Remove armrest cap (1) with remover tool (A).

5. Remove screws (A), located behind the armrest cap.

6. Remove step lamp (1).Refer to INL-102, "Removal and Installation".

7. Insert a remover tool (A) into clips on door finisher (1), and dis-engage clips.

CAUTION:Insert a remover tool into the part shown in the figure.(Between the clips and the body side panel).

JMJIA0074GB

: Pawl

JMJIA0957ZZ

JMJIA0958ZZ

JMJIA0077GB

: Clip

JMJIA0078GB


DOOR FINISHER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

8. Pull up door finisher and pull out toward vehicle inside.• Disconnect seat memory switch connector (A) (with ADP).• Disconnect tweeter connector (B) (with BASE AUDIO).• Disconnect door squawker connector (B) (with BOSE AUDIO).

9. Disconnect the inside handle cable from door inside handle assembly. Refer to DLK-231, "INSIDE HAN-DLE : Exploded View".

10. Disconnect power window switch connector and mirror control switch connector.11. Remove door finisher.12. Remove the following parts after removing door finisher.

• Door inside handle assembly. Refer to DLK-231, "INSIDE HANDLE : Exploded View".• Seat memory switch (with ADP). Refer to ADP-232, "Removal and Installation".• Tweeter. Refer to AV-115, "Removal and Installation".• Door squawker (with BOSE AUDIO). Refer to AV-618, "Removal and Installation".

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:When installing door finisher, check that clips are securely fitted in panel holes on body, and thenpress them in.

JMJIA0080GB


BODY SIDE TRIM
BODY SIDE TRIM



CAUTION:• When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.• Never damage the body.

REMOVAL

FRONT PILLAR GARNISH

1. Release front pillar portion of body side welt.

1. Front pillar garnish 2. Kicking plate outer 3. Dash side finisher

4. Kicking plate inner 5. Rear side finisher 6. Rear pillar finisher

7. Back pillar garnish 8. Body side welt

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for the symbols in the figure.

JMJIA2411ZZ


BODY SIDE TRIM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

2. Remove front pillar garnish fixing clip and metal clip with aremover tool (A), and then remove front pillar garnish (1).

DASH SIDE FINISHER

1. Remove instrument passenger lower cover. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove kicking plate inner.3. Remove clip (A).4. Remove dash side finisher fixing clips with a remover tool (B),

and then remove dash side finisher (1).

KICKING PLATE OUTERRemove kicking plate outer fixing clips with a remover tool (A), andthen remove kicking plate outer (1).

KICKING PLATE INNER

1. Pull up kicking plate inner, and disconnect pawls. 2. Remove kicking plate inner (1).

BODY SIDE WELT

1. Remove kicking plate inner.2. Remove body side welt.

REAR SIDE FINISHER

1. Remove rear seat cushion and rear seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".

: Clip

: Metal clip

JMJIA1273ZZ

: Clip

JMJIA0961ZZ

: Clip

JMJIA0082GB

: Pawl

JMJIA0962ZZ


BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >2. Remove body side welt.3. Remove rear side finisher (1) fixing clips with a remover tool (A),
and then disconnect rear speaker harness connector.

4. Remove rear side finisher.

BACK PILLAR GARNISH

1. Remove back pillar garnish (1) fixing clips and pawls with aremover tool (A).

2. Remove back pillar garnish (1) from rear pillar finisher (2).

REAR PILLAR FINISHER

1. Remove rear seat cushion and rear seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove body side welt.3. Remove rear side finisher.4. Remove front seat belt floor anchor bolt. Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View".5. Remove rear seat belt floor anchor bolt. Refer to SB-12, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View".6. Remove rear seat belt escutcheon fixing pawls with remover tool

(A), and then remove rear seat belt escutcheon (1) from rear pil-lar finisher (2).

7. Remove back pillar garnish.8. Remove rear pillar finisher fixing clips, pawl, metal clips with a remover tool, and then remove rear pillar

finisher.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Check that clips are securely fitted in panel holes on body when installing, and then press them in.

: Clip

JMJIA0963ZZ

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA2439ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0965ZZ


REAR PARCEL SHELF FINISHER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I



Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.


REMOVAL1. Remove trunk front finisher upper (without REAR SPOILER). Refer to INT-27, "Removal and Installation".

1. Rear speaker grille 2. Child anchor cover 3. Rear seatback finisher RH

4. Rear seatback finisher LH 5. Push on nut 6. Rear parcel shelf finisher

7. Rear seatback welt 8. High-mounted stop lamp assembly 9. High-mounted stop lamp cover

10. Rear seat striker cover

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0966ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >2. Disconnect high-mounted stop lamp harness connector (A).
(without REAR SPOILER)

3. Remove rear seat cushion and rear seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".4. Remove rear side finisher and rear pillar finisher. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".5. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher mounting clips (A).

6. Remove rear seat striker cover fixing pawls, and then remove rear seat striker cover.7. Pull rear parcel shelf finisher, and then remove rear parcel shelf finisher.8. Remove the following parts after removing rear parcel shelf finisher.

• Child anchor cover.• Rear speaker grille.• High-mounted stop lamp (without REAR SPOILER). Refer to EXL-205, "WITHOUT REAR SPOILER :

Removal and Installation".

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Check that clips are securely fitted in panel holes on body when installing, and then press them in.

JMJIA0090GB

JMJIA0967ZZ


FLOOR TRIM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

FLOOR TRIM



REMOVAL1. Remove front seat assembly (LH/RH). Refer to SE-182, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".3. Remove accelerator pedal pad. Refer to BR-19, "Removal and Installation".4. Disengage clip of floor hook (1) with remover tool (A).

5. Remove foot grille. Refer to VTL-13, "FOOT GRILLE : Removal and Installation".

1. Floor hook 2. Floor trim 3. Fixing clip

4. Rear floor spacer (RH) 5. Rear floor spacer (LH) 6. Front floor spacer (LH)

7. Front floor spacer (RH) 8. Footrest

JMJIA0968ZZ

: Clip

JMJIA0092GB


FLOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >6. Remove front seat belt floor anchor bolt (LH/RH). Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Exploded View".7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".8. Remove instrument lower cover, instrument driver panel, instrument assist lower panel and instrument
side panel (LH/RH). Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".9. Remove YAW RATE/G-SENSOR (1).

Refer to BRC-104, "Removal and Installation".10. Remove diagnosis sensor unit (2).

Refer to SR-24, "Removal and Installation".11. Remove console rear bracket (3).

Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".12. Remove floor harness mounting clamps (A).

13. Remove dash side finisher (LH/RH), front kicking plate inner (LH/RH) and body side welt (LH/RH).Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

14. Remove floor trim mounting clips and fixing nuts.15. Remove floor trim from floor trim fixing clips (A) and remove floor

carpet (1).


JMJIA0093GB

JMJIA0094GB


HEADLINING

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

HEADLININGNORMAL ROOF

NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004498880

1. Sun visor holder 2. Sun visor cover 3. Sun visor assembly

4. Roof front finisher 5. Assist grip 6. Headlining assembly

7. Rear hidden clip 8. Antenna feeder 9. Roof console assembly

10. Dual lock fastener 11. Roof harness 12. Roof bracket

13. Roof plate assembly 14. Map lamp assembly 15. Map lamp bulbs (LH/RH)

16. Map lamp lens (LH/RH)

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

:Vehicle front

JMJIA2734ZZ


HEADLINING
NORMAL ROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004498881

REMOVAL1. Remove front pillar garnish (LH/RH) and body side welt (LH/RH).

Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove antenna feeder securing clips with a remover tool after

removing front pillar garnish (LH), then disconnect antennafeeder connectors (A).

3. Remove front roof finisher mounting metal clips and pawls with aremover tool (A), and then remove front roof finisher (1).

4. Remove sun visor assembly (LH/RH).• Remove sun visor cover.• Remove sun visor assembly mounting screws.• Disconnect vanity mirror lamp harness connectors.

5. Rotate 45 degrees and remove sun visor holder (1) (LH/RH).

6. Remove mounting plastic clips (A) using a screwdriver (B) offront and rear assistance grips (1), and then remove assist grips.

7. Remove rear seat cushion and seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".

: Clip

JMJIA0101GB

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA2482ZZ

JMJIA2481ZZ

JMJIA0096GB


HEADLINING

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

8. Remove front kicking plate inner (LH/RH), rear side finisher (LH/RH), rear pillar finisher (LH/RH).Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

9. Disconnect antenna feeder connectors (A) of antenna amplifierand sub-antenna feeder (1) after removing rear pillar finisher(LH), and then remove antenna feeder securing clip and groundcable fixing bolt (B).

10. With a remover tool, remove body side mounting plastic clip from rear end of headlining.11. Pull the roof console assembly toward vehicle lower, and disen-

gage the metal clips (B) and the dual-lock fastener (A). CAUTION:Roof console assembly is crimped from back of headlining.Remove it by disengaging the crimped area of back of roofconsole assembly after removing headlining from the vehi-cle.

12. Put front seat to front must and recline seat back to backward. 13. Remove headlining (1), turn and take out from right side door.

CAUTION:• When removing the headlining, 2 workers are required. (1

for the front and rear of headlining)• Cover center console finisher upper surface with a shop

cloth to prevent it from being damaged.• Never bend headlining when removing.

14. Remove the following parts after removing headlining.• Map lamp assembly (without LDW system). Refer to INT-21, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View".• Roof harness assembly.• Antenna feeder assembly.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Install headlining assembly after inserting clips to clip holder of headlining rear end.• Never bend headlining when installing.SUNROOF

: Clip

JMJIA0971ZZ

JMJIA0099GB

JMJIA0975ZZ


HEADLINING
SUNROOF : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004498882

SUNROOF : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004498883

REMOVAL

1. Sun visor holder 2. Sun visor cover 3. Sun visor assembly

4. Roof front finisher 5. Assist grip 6. Headlining assembly

7. Rear hidden clip 8. Antenna feeder 9. Roof console assembly

10. Dual lock fastener 11. Roof harness 12. Roof bracket

13. Roof plate assembly 14. Map lamp assembly 15. Map lamp bulbs (LH/RH)

16. Map lamp lens (LH/RH)

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

: Vehicle front

JMJIA2735ZZ


HEADLINING

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

1. Remove front pillar garnish (LH/RH) and body side welt (LH/RH).Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

2. Remove antenna feeder securing clips with a remover tool afterremoving front pillar garnish (LH), then disconnect antennafeeder connectors (A).

3. Remove front roof finisher mounting metal clips and pawls with aremover tool (A), and then remove front roof finisher (1).

4. Remove sun visor assembly (LH/RH).• Remove sun visor cover.• Remove sun visor assembly mounting screws.• Disconnect vanity mirror lamp harness connectors.

5. Rotate 45 degrees and remove sun visor holder (1) (LH/RH).

6. Remove mounting plastic clips (A) using a screwdriver (B) offront and rear assistance grips (1), and then remove assist grips.

7. Remove rear seat cushion and seatback. Refer to SE-192, "Removal and Installation".8. Remove front kicking plate inner (LH/RH), rear side finisher (LH/RH), rear pillar finisher (LH/RH).

Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

: Clip

JMJIA0101GB

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA2482ZZ

JMJIA2481ZZ

JMJIA0096GB


HEADLINING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >9. Disconnect antenna feeder connectors (A) of antenna amplifier
and sub-antenna feeder (1) after removing rear pillar finisher(LH), and then remove antenna feeder securing clip and groundcable fixing bolt (B).

10. With a remover tool, remove body side mounting plastic clip from rear end of headlining.11. Pull the roof console assembly toward vehicle lower, and disen-

gage the metal clips (B) and the dual-lock fastener (A). CAUTION:Roof console assembly is crimped from back of headlining.Remove it by disengaging the crimped area of back of roofconsole assembly after removing headlining from the vehi-cle.

12. Put front seat to front must and recline seat back to backward. 13. Remove headlining (1), turn and take out from right side door.

CAUTION:• When removing the headlining, 2 workers are required. (1

for the front and rear of headlining)• Cover center console finisher upper surface with a shop

cloth to prevent it from being damaged.• Never bend headlining when removing.

14. Remove the following parts after removing headlining.• Map lamp assembly (without LDW system). Refer to INT-24, "SUNROOF : Exploded View".• Roof harness assembly.• Antenna feeder assembly.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:• Install headlining assembly after inserting clips to clip holder of headlining rear end.• Never bend headlining when installing.

: Clip

JMJIA0971ZZ

JMJIA0099GB

JMJIA0972ZZ


TRUNK ROOM TRIM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

TRUNK ROOM TRIM



REMOVAL1. Fully open trunk lid assembly.2. Remove trunk floor carpet.3. Remove trunk rear plate mounting clips, hold and pull the trunk rear plate to disengage the metal clip and

then remove it.4. Remove trunk floor cover mounting clips, and then remove trunk floor cover.5. Remove trunk weather-strip.6. Remove trunk rear finisher mounting clips and trunk net hook, and then remove trunk rear finisher.7. Remove trunk center box.8. Remove spare tire.(With spare tire)9. Remove rear seatback welt. Refer to INT-17, "Exploded View".

1. Trunk front finisher upper 2. Trunk floor cover 3. Rear wheel house finisher LH

4. Trunk floor spacer LH 5. Trunk floor felt 6. Trunk rear finisher

7. Trunk rear plate 8. Rear wheel house finisher (RH) 9. Rear seat control lever escutcheon

10. Trunk floor carpet 11. Trunk center box 12. Trunk floor spacer RH

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0973ZZ


TRUNK ROOM TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >10. Remove trunk front finisher mounting clips and metal clips, and then remove trunk front finisher.11. Remove trunk side finisher mounting clip and metal clip, and then remove trunk side finisher (LH/RH).12. Remove jack.13. Remove the trunk floor spacer cover.14. Remove trunk floor spacer mounting nuts, and then remove trunk floor spacer (LH/RH).
INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.CAUTION:Check that clips, pawls, metal clips are securely fitted in panel holes on body when installing, and thenpress them in.


TRUNK LID TRIM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

NT

N

O

P


I

TRUNK LID TRIM



REMOVAL1. Fully open trunk lid assembly.2. Remove trunk lid bumper rubber. Refer to DLK-221, "TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".3. Remove trunk lid pull handle (1).

1. Trunk lid bumper rubber 2. Trunk lid finisher inner 3. Trunk lid assembly

4. Emergency handle 5. Trunk lid pull handle

: Pawl

JMJIA0974ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0104GB


TRUNK LID TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >4. Remove trunk lid emergency handle holder (1).
5. Remove trunk lid finisher mounting clips, and then remove trunk lid finisher inner.


: Clip

JMJIA0105GB


BODY INTERIOR

C

D

E

SECTION IPA

B

INSTRUMENT PANEL

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

P

N

O

P

CONTENTS

I

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 2

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-NOSES ................................................................ 2

Work Flow .................................................................2Inspection Procedure ................................................4Diagnostic Worksheet ...............................................6

PRECAUTION ............................................... 8

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 8Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...................................................................8Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-tion after Battery Disconnect .....................................8Precaution for Battery Service ..................................9Precaution .................................................................9

PREPARATION ...........................................10

PREPARATION .................................................10Special Service Tools ............................................10Commercial Service Tools .....................................10


INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY .................11Exploded View .........................................................11Removal and Installation .........................................12

CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY ....................23Exploded View .........................................................23Removal and Installation .........................................24Disassembly and Assembly .....................................27

IP-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISSQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES


CUSTOMER INTERVIEWInterview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any ofcustomer's comments; refer to IP-6, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate theconditions that exist when the noise occurs.• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain

all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is

concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics

are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language whendefining the noise.

• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping

• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-dent on materials/often brought on by activity.

• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missingclip or fastener/incorrect clearance.

• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.

• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driveraction or road conditions.

• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.

• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.

• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that a technicianmay judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.

• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

SBT842



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information onthe Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used toduplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:1) Close a door.2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.3) Rev the engine.4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the

vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINSAfter verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relatedto that concern or symptom.If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool

(Chassis ear: J-39570, Engine ear and mechanics stethoscope).2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.

Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be brokenor lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.

• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-porarily.

• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of thenoise.

• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.• Looking for loose components and contact marks.

Refer to IP-4, "Inspection Procedure".

REPAIR THE CAUSE• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-

thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized Nissan PartsDepartment.

CAUTION:Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.NOTE:Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can beordered separately as needed.URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]Insulates connectors, harness, etc.• 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in)• 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in)• 76884-71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in)INSULATOR (Foam blocks)Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.• 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)• 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)INSULATOR (Light foam block)80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in)FELT CLOTHTAPE


< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.• 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad• 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape rollThe following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.UHMW (TEFLON) TAPEInsulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.SILICONE GREASEUsed in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. Will only last a few months.SILICONE SPRAYUsed when grease cannot be applied.DUCT TAPEUsed to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIRConfirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the sameconditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000004392116

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.

INSTRUMENT PANELMost incidents are caused by contact and movement between:1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish4. Instrument panel to windshield5. Instrument panel mounting pins6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint

These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or bypressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired byapplying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulatewiring harness.CAUTION:Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, therecheck of repair becomes impossible.

CENTER CONSOLEComponents to pay attention to include:1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unitThe instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORSPay attention to the following:1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher3. Wiring harnesses tapping4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stopsTapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolatemany of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks fromthe Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.

TRUNKTrunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.In addition look for the following:1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together4. A loose license plate or bracketMost of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-ing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLININGNoises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeakingAgain, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of theseincidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

SEATSWhen isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seats in and the load placed on the seat whenthe noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise.Cause of seat noise include:1. Headrest rods and holder2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame3. The rear seatback lock and bracketThese noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-ditions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the componentor applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOODSome interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is thentransmitted into the passenger compartment.Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:1. Any component mounted to the engine wall2. Components that pass through the engine wall3. Engine wall mounts and connectors4. Loose radiator mounting pins5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment6. Hood striker out of adjustmentThese noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The bestmethod is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPMor load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, orinsulating the component causing the noise.


Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000004250002

PIIB8741E



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

PIIB8742E


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >









Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation after Battery DisconnectINFOID:0000000004250004

NOTE:• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the push-button ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion, then disconnect both battery cables.• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect both

battery cables.• Always use CONSULT-III to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing work.

If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock andcannot be turned.If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-cedure below before starting the repair operation.

OPERATION PROCEDURE1. Connect both battery cables.

NOTE:Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to ACC position.(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)

3. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-nected and the steering wheel can be turned.

4. Perform the necessary repair operation.


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P

< PRECAUTION >

I

5. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turnthe push-button ignition switch from ACC position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steeringwheel will lock when the push-button ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)

6. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT-III.



Precaution INFOID:0000000004250005

• Disconnect both battery cables in advance.• Disconnect air bag system line in advance.• Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.• Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.• When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts, which may

get in the way with cloth.• When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape. • Keep removed parts protected with cloth.• If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.• If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.• Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.• After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.• Remove stains in the following way.Water-soluble stains:Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.Oil stain:Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stainwith the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely.Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.• Never use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >




Tool number(Kent-Moore No.)

Tool nameDescription

(J-39570)Chassis ear

Locates the noise

(J-43980)NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairs the cause of noise

SIIA0993E

SIIA0994E


Engine ear Locates the noise

Remover tool Removes clips, pawls, and metal clips

Power tool

SIIA0995E

JMKIA3050ZZ

PIIB1407E


INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONINSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY


JMJIA0343ZZ




WORK STEPWhen removing instrument panel assembly, combination meter, audio unit, and center console take steps inthe order shown by the number below.

1. Instrument finisher A 2. Cluster lid A (Combination meter) 3. Steering column cover upper

4. Steering column cover lower 5. Steering column side cover LH 6. Steering column side cover RH

7. Steering column mask 8. Cluster lid A lower bracket 9. Steering column front lower cover

10. Meter bracket 11. Knee protector 12. Instrument lower panel LH

13. Cluster lid C 14. AV control unit 15. Cluster lid D

16. Center ventilator grille LH 17. Center ventilator grille RH 18. Glove box assembly

19. Glove box lock assembly 20. Instrument finisher B 21. Instrument lower cover

22. Instrument lower panel RH 23. Instrument side panel LH 24. Instrument side panel RH

25. Instrument side finisher RH 26. Instrument side finisher LH 27. Instrument panel assembly

28. Center speaker grille 29. Display unit 30. Display unit bracket

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

PARTSINSTRUMENT PANEL

ASSEMBLYCOMBINATION

METERAV CONTROL UNIT

CENTER CONSOLE

Selector/shift lever Knob [1] [1] [1]

Console finisher [2] [2] [2]

Rear upper console assembly(7AT models only)

[3] [3]

Coin pocket (6MT models only) [4] [4]

Console rear finisher [5] [5]

Console mask [6] [6]

Center console assembly [7] [7]

Cluster lid C [8] [3]

Cluster lid D [9] [4]

Display unit [10] [5]

AV control unit [11] [6]

Body side welt LH [12]

Front pillar garnish LH [13]

Instrument side finisher LH [14]

Instrument lower panel LH [15]

Instrument finisher A [16]

Instrument side panel LH [17]

Steering wheel assembly [18] [1]

Steering column cover [19] [2]

Combination switch [20] [3]

Spiral cable [21]

Paddle switch (7AT models only) [22] [4]

Knee protector [23] [5]



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

[ ]: Number indicates step in removal procedures.

REMOVAL1. Put selector lever in drive position (7AT models only).2. Remove selector lever knob (7AT models only).

• 2WD models: Refer to TM-277, "2WD : Exploded View".• AWD models: Refer to TM-279, "AWD : Exploded View".

3. Remove shift lever knob (6MT models only). Refer to TM-18, "Exploded View".4. Remove console finisher.

• Remove clips from rear of console finisher (1), and then remove pawl of front. • Pull console finisher (1) upward to disengage from center console. • Disconnect harness connectors.

5. Remove screws (B) of center console front side with screwdriver (A).

Cluster lid A (Combination meter) [24] [6]

Meter bracket [25]

Front defroster grille (LH/RH) [26]

Body side welt RH [27]

Front pillar garnish RH [28]

Instrument side finisher RH [29]

Instrument lower cover [30]

Glove box assembly [31]

Instrument lower assist panel [32]

Instrument finisher RH [33]

Instrument side panel RH [34]

Instrument panel assembly [35]

(A) Console finisher (7AT models) (B) Console finisher (6MT models)

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0489ZZ

JMJIA0032GB


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >6. Remove rear upper console assembly (7AT models only).
• Slide forward, pull up rear upper console assembly (1), anddisconnect metal clips.

• Disconnect heated seat switch harness connectors. (with heated seat)

7. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector (A) and power socketharness connector (B) (7AT models only).

8. Disconnect console sub harness connectors (A) (6MT modelsonly).

9. Disconnect heated seat switch connector (A) (6MT models withheated seat only).

10. Remove coin pocket fixing pawl using a remover tool (A), andthen remove coin pocket (1) (6MT models only).

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0033GB

JMJIA0065ZZ

JMJIA0038GB

JMJIA0286ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0034GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

11. Insert a deep-well socket wrench (A) to rotate adjusting nut toloosen cable sufficiently (6MT models only).Refer to PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment".

12. Remove console rear finisher.• Pull back the console rear finisher (1).• Disconnect inside key antenna connector (A).

13. Remove console mask.

• Open the console lid.• Pull up console mask (1) by using a remover tool (C), and disengage pawls.

14. Remove screws (C) of center console rear side, and then remove center console assembly (1).

JMJIA0035GB

: Metal clip

JMJIA0037GB

(A) Console mask (7AT models) (B) Console mask (6MT models)

: Pawl

JMJIA0948ZZ

(A) Console mounting screws (7AT models) (B) Console mounting screws (6MT models)

JMJIA0949ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >15. Remove cluster lid C.
• Remove cluster lid C mounting screws (A).• Pull back cluster lid C (1).• Disconnect harness connectors.

16. Remove cluster lid D.• Remove cluster lid D mounting screws (A).• Pull back cluster lid D (1).• Disconnect harness connectors.

17. Remove display unit. Refer to AV-112, "Removal and Installation".18. Disconnect center speaker harness connector (A).

(with center speaker)19. Remove screw (B).

20. Disconnect inside key antenna connector (A) and clip (B)located under audio unit.

21. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-348, "Removal and Installation".22. Remove body side welt LH. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".23. Remove front pillar garnish LH. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".

JMJIA0043GB

: Pawl

JMJIA0044GB

JMJIA0045GB

JMJIA0046GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

24. Disconnect antenna harness connectors (A) and then removeharness clips.

25. Remove instrument side finisher LH.• Insert a remover tool into lower space.• Pull the instrument side finisher LH (1) crosswise.

26. Remove instrument lower panel LH.• Remove hood opener mounting bolts (A).

Refer to DLK-209, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL : Removal andInstallation".

• Remove data link connector mounting screws (B). • Pull back instrument lower panel LH (1).• Disconnect harness connectors.

27. Remove instrument finisher A. Pull instrument finisher A (1) upward, and then disengage pawls.

28. Remove instrument side panel LH.• Remove instrument side panel mounting screws (A).• Pull the instrument side panel LH (1) crosswise.

: Clip

JMJIA0102GB

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0040GB

: Pawl

: Metal clipJMJIA0041GB

: Clip

JMJIA0053GB

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0042GB


29. Remove steering wheel assembly. Refer to ST-17, "Removal and Installation".30. Remove steering column covers.

CAUTION:When removing the column covers, to facilitate the work operation remove first the steeringwheel.

• Remove steering column front lower cover (1).• Remove cluster lid A lower bracket (2).

• Remove steering column mask (3) and screws.• Pull up steering column cover upper (4).• Remove steering column side cover RH (5) (with PADDLE SHIFTER).• Pull the steering column side cover LH (6) to the left side (with PADDLE SHIFTER). • Disconnect ADP steering switch connector (with ADP).• Remove steering column side cover LH (6).• Remove screws, and then remove steering column lower cover (7).

31. Remove combination switch. Refer to BCS-82, "Exploded View".32. Remove spiral cable and steering angle sensor. Refer to SR-15, "Exploded View".

CAUTION:Perform 4WAS front actuator adjustment. Refer to STC-28, "4WAS FRONT ACTUATOR NEUTRALPOSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".

33. Remove paddle switch LH/RH (with PADDLE SHIFTER). Refer to TM-282, "Exploded View".34. Remove cluster lid A (Combination meter).

(A) Column cover (with electric column) (B) Column cover (with manual column)

(A) Column cover (with PADDLE SHIFTER) (B) Column cover (without PADDLE SHIFTER)

: Pawl

JMJIA0047GB

JMJIA0048GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

• Remove knee protector mounting bolts (A) with power tool,and then remove knee protector (1).

• Disengage harness cover mounting pawl (B) by using tool (A)located under the column shaft.

• Pull down harness cover (1).(with harness cover)

• Remove cluster lid A (combination meter) mounting bolts (A).

• Disconnect push button ignition switch harness connector (A). • Pull back cluster lid A (combination meter), and disconnect

combination meter connectors.NOTE:For removal and installation of combination meter, refer toMWI-125, "Removal and Installation".

JMJIA0064GB

JMJIA0049GB

JMJIA0050GB

JMJIA0051GB


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >35. Remove meter bracket mounting bolts (A), and then remove
meter bracket (1).

36. Remove front defroster grille LH. Refer to VTL-12, "FRONT DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Instal-lation".• Pull upward, disengage pawls.• Disconnect harness connector.

37. Remove front defroster grille RH. Refer to VTL-12, "FRONT DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Instal-lation".• Pull upward, disengaged pawls.• Disconnect harness connector.

38. Remove body side welt RH. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".39. Remove front pillar garnish RH. Refer to INT-14, "Removal and Installation".40. Remove instrument side finisher RH.

• Insert a remover tool into lower space.• Pull the instrument side finisher RH (1) crosswise.

41. Remove instrument lower cover.• Pull downward, disengaged pawls. • Pull back instrument lower cover (1).

42. Remove glove box assembly.• Open the glove box.

JMJIA0052GB

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0054GB

: Pawl

JMJIA0055GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

• Pull up glove box assembly (1).

• Remove damper pin (2) of left side.

43. Remove instrument lower panel RH.• Remove instrument lower panel RH mounting screws (A) with

power tool.• Pull back instrument lower panel RH (1).• Disconnect harness connector.

44. Remove instrument finisher B.Pull instrument finisher B (1) upward then disengage pawls.

45. Remove instrument side panel RH.• Remove instrument side panel mounting screws (A).• Pull the instrument side panel RH (1) crosswise.

JMJIA0056GB

JMJIA0057GB

JMJIA0058GB

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0059GB

: Clip

: Pawl

JMJIA0060GB


46. Disconnect passenger air bag module connector. Refer to SR-18, "Removal and Installation".47. Remove passenger air bag module fixing bolt. Refer to SR-18, "Exploded View".48. Remove instrument panel assembly.

• Remove defroster nozzle mounting clips (A).• Remove screws (B) and bolts (C) with power tool, and then remove instrument panel assembly (1).

CAUTION:When removing instrument panel, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping.

49. Remove the following parts after removing instrument panel assembly.• Antenna feeder• Center speaker grille • Center speaker: Refer to AV-354, "Removal and Installation".• Front passenger air bag module: Refer to SR-18, "Removal and Installation".• Side ventilator grille LH/RH: Refer to VTL-11, "SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation".• Inside key antenna: Refer to DLK-238, "INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation".• Combination meter: Refer to MWI-125, "Removal and Installation".


JMJIA0061GB


CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I



CENTER CONSOLE (7AT MODELS)

CENTER CONSOLE (6MT MODELS)

1. Console finisher assembly 2. Rear upper console assembly 3. Switch panel

4. Switch hole mask 5. Center console assembly 6. Console pocket

7. Console rear bracket 8. Console rear finisher 9. Console ashtray bracket

10. Console ashtray 11. Ashtray (front) 12. Cigarette lighter

13. Cup holder assembly 14. Console lid 15. Console mask

16. Auxiliary input jacks 17. Cigarette lighter case 18. Socket knob

19. Console front bracket

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0946ZZ




REMOVAL1. Put selector lever in drive position (7AT models only).2. Remove selector lever knob (7AT models only).

• 2WD models: Refer to TM-277, "2WD : Exploded View".• AWD models: Refer to TM-279, "AWD : Exploded View".

3. Remove shift lever knob (6MT models only). Refer to TM-18, "Exploded View".4. Remove console finisher.

1. Console finisher assembly 2. Center console assembly 3. Coin pocket

4. Console mask 5. Cigarette lighter case 6. Socket knob

7. Console rear bracket 8. Console rear finisher 9. Console ashtray bracket

10. Console ashtray 11. Cup holder assembly 12. Auxiliary input jacks

13. Switch hole mask 14. Console sub harness 15. Cigarette lighter

16. Ashtray (front) 17. Parking brake lever finisher 18. Console lid

: Clip

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0947ZZ



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

• Remove clips from rear of console finisher (1), and then remove pawl of front. • Pull console finisher (1) upward to disengage from center console. • Disconnect harness connectors.

5. Remove screws (B) of center console front side with screwdriver (A).

6. Remove rear upper console assembly (7AT models only).• Slide to front, pull up rear upper console assembly (1), and

disconnect metal clips.• Disconnect heated seat switch harness connectors.

(with heated seat)

7. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector (A) and power socketharness connector (B) (7AT models only).

(A) Console finisher (7AT models) (B) Console finisher (6MT models)

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0489ZZ

JMJIA0032GB

: Pawl

: Metal clip

JMJIA0033GB

JMJIA0065ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >8. Disconnect console sub harness connectors (A) (6MT models
only).

9. Disconnect heated seat switch connector (A) (6MT models withheated seat only).

10. Remove coin pocket fixing pawl using a remover tool (A), andthen remove coin pocket (1) (6MT models only).

11. Insert a deep-well socket wrench (A) to rotate adjusting nut toloosen cable sufficiently (6MT models only).Refer to PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment".

12. Remove console rear finisher.• Pull back the console rear finisher (1).• Disconnect inside key antenna connector (A).

JMJIA0038GB

JMJIA0286ZZ

: Pawl

JMJIA0034GB

JMJIA0035GB

: Metal clip

JMJIA0037GB



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

K

L

M

A

B

P

N

O

P


I

13. Remove console mask.

• Open the console lid.• Pull up console mask (1) by using a remover tool (C), and disengage pawls.

14. Remove screws (C) of center console rear side, and then remove center console assembly (1).


Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004250012

CAUTION:When disassembling, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CENTER CONSOLE (7AT MODELS)

Disassembly

1. Remove screws of console finisher assembly back side, and remove ashtray (front portion).2. Remove rear upper console assembly. Refer to IP-12.3. Remove screws and remove cup holder assembly.4. Remove screws and remove console front bracket.5. Remove console mask. Refer to IP-12.6. Remove console lid mounting screws and remove console lid.7. Remove metal clips and remove console rear finisher. Refer to IP-12.8. Remove console ashtray.9. Remove screw and remove console ashtray bracket.10. Remove console pocket from center console assembly.11. Remove auxiliary input jacks and socket knob, cigarette lighter case.

Assembly

(A) Console mask (7AT models) (B) Console mask (6MT models)

: Pawl

JMJIA0948ZZ

(A) Console mounting screws (7AT models) (B) Console mounting screws (6MT models)

JMJIA0949ZZ


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CENTER CONSOLE (6MT MODELS)

Disassembly

1. Remove screws of console finisher assembly back side, and remove ashtray (front portion).2. Remove coin pocket. Refer to IP-12.3. Remove console mask. Refer to IP-12.4. Remove console lid mounting screws and remove console lid.5. Remove metal clips and remove console rear finisher. Refer to IP-12.6. Remove console ashtray.7. Remove screw and remove console ashtray bracket.8. Remove screws and remove cup holder assembly.9. Remove auxiliary input jacks and socket knob, cigarette lighter case.10. Remove console sub harness.

AssemblyAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.


ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

C

D

E

BSECTION LAN

A

LAN SYSTEM

AN

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

O

P

N

CONTENTS

L

CAN FUNDAMENTAL

PRECAUTION ............................................... 8

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 8Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ............................8Precautions for Harness Repair ................................8


CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ..................... 9System Description ...................................................9System Diagram ........................................................9CAN Communication Control Circuit .......................10

DIAG ON CAN ....................................................11Description ..............................................................11System Diagram ......................................................11

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .....................................12Condition of Error Detection ....................................12Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communi-cation System ..........................................................12CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT-III ..........................15Self-Diagnosis .........................................................15CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor ............................15How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart ......17

BASIC INSPECTION ...................................18

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........18Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart .................................18Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ..................................18

CAN

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .....................23

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ...........................23Caution ....................................................................23Abbreviation List ......................................................23

PRECAUTION ..............................................24

PRECAUTIONS .................................................24Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" .................................................................24Precaution for Battery Service .................................24Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ..........................24Precautions for Harness Repair ..............................25

BASIC INSPECTION ...................................26

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........26Interview Sheet ........................................................26

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................27

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ...................27CAN System Specification Chart .............................27CAN Communication Signal Chart ..........................27


CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ...................32Component Parts Location ......................................32Wiring Diagram - CAN SYSTEM - ...........................33

MALFUNCTION AREA CHART ........................39Main Line .................................................................39Branch Line .............................................................39Short Circuit .............................................................39

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ..................................................................40

Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................40

MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ..................................................................41


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT ..................................................................42


LAN-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 44

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44

MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 45

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 47Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47

4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 48Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 49Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................. 50Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 51Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 52Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 53Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 54Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 55Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 55

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 56Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 57Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 58Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 59Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 60Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60

ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................ 61Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 62Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 62

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT .................... 63Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 63

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 65

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 65

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 65

MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 66


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 67


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 69Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 69

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 70Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................. 71Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 71

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 72Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 73Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 73

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 74Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 75Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 76Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 77Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 78Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ................... 79Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 81

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 81


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 82


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 83


MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 84


AN

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................86Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................86

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................87Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................87

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..............................88Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................88

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..........................89Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................89

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................90Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................90

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..........................91Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................91

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................92Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................92

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................93Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................93

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................94Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................94

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................95Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................95

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................96Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................96

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ....................97Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................97

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)


MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ....................................................................99


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 100

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 101


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 103Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 103

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 104Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................ 105Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 106

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................106

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 107Diagnosis Procedure .............................................107

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 108Diagnosis Procedure .............................................108

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 109Diagnosis Procedure .............................................109

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 110Diagnosis Procedure .............................................110

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 111Diagnosis Procedure .............................................111

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 112Diagnosis Procedure .............................................112

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 113Diagnosis Procedure .............................................113

ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 114Diagnosis Procedure .............................................114

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ................... 115Diagnosis Procedure .............................................115

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ................. 116Diagnosis Procedure .............................................116

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 118

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 118


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 119


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 120


MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 121


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 123Diagnosis Procedure .............................................123

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .................... 124Diagnosis Procedure .............................................124

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 125Diagnosis Procedure .............................................125

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 126Diagnosis Procedure .............................................126


PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 127Diagnosis Procedure .............................................127

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 128Diagnosis Procedure .............................................128

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 129Diagnosis Procedure .............................................129

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 130Diagnosis Procedure .............................................130

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 131Diagnosis Procedure .............................................131


RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 133Diagnosis Procedure .............................................133


ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 135Diagnosis Procedure .............................................135


CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT .................. 137Diagnosis Procedure .............................................137

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................139

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 139


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 140


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 141


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 143Diagnosis Procedure .............................................143


AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 145Diagnosis Procedure .............................................145

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 146Diagnosis Procedure .............................................146

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 147Diagnosis Procedure .............................................147

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................148Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................149Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 149

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................150Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................151Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 151

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................152Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 152

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................153Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 153

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ..................154Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 154

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .......................156





MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIR-CUIT ..................................................................158


MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIR-CUIT ..................................................................159


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................161Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .....................162Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................163Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 163

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................164Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 164

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................165Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165





AN

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 169Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 170Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 171Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .................... 172Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT .................. 173Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)


MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 175


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 176


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT .................................................................. 177


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 179Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 179

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 180Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................ 181Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 181

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 182Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 182

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 183Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 184Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 184

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 185Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 186Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 187Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 187

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 188Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 189Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 189


ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 191Diagnosis Procedure .............................................191



CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)


MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 195


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 196


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 197


MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................ 198


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 200Diagnosis Procedure .............................................200


AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 202Diagnosis Procedure .............................................202

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 203Diagnosis Procedure .............................................203

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 204Diagnosis Procedure .............................................204


AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 206Diagnosis Procedure .............................................206

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 207Diagnosis Procedure .............................................207

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................... 208Diagnosis Procedure .............................................208

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 209Diagnosis Procedure .............................................209



RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 211Diagnosis Procedure .............................................211


ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 213Diagnosis Procedure .............................................213


CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT .................. 215Diagnosis Procedure .............................................215

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................217

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 217


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 218


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT ................................................................. 219


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 221Diagnosis Procedure .............................................221

4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 222Diagnosis Procedure .............................................222


AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 224Diagnosis Procedure .............................................224

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 225Diagnosis Procedure .............................................225


DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 227Diagnosis Procedure .............................................227

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................ 228Diagnosis Procedure .............................................228

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 229Diagnosis Procedure .............................................229



IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ....................232Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ..................233Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 233

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS .......................235





MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIR-CUIT ..................................................................237


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................239Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239

4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................240Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 240

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .....................241Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................242Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................243Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................244Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................245Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..........................246Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246




ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................250Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 250

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .........................251Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251

ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................252Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252


AN

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .................... 253Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 253



[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]PRECAUTIONS

< PRECAUTION >


Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000004457684

CAUTION:• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when

checking the harness.

Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000004457685

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.NOTE:A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.NOTE:Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. Thespliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twistedline are lost.

• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-tion line.

SKIB8766E

SKIB8767E


AN

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONCAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


• CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receivelarge quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two communication lines (CAN-H andCAN-L).

• Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit. Theyreceive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions.

• CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.


Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN communicationsignal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L. CANcommunication system transmits and receives CAN communication signals by the potential difference.

SKIB8887E

Component Description

Main line CAN communication line between splices

Branch line CAN communication line between splice and a control unit

Splice A point connecting a branch line with a main line

Termination circuit Refer to LAN-10, "CAN Communication Control Circuit".


[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


CAN Communication Control Circuit INFOID:0000000004457688

*: These are the only control units wired with both ends of CAN communication system.

SKIB8713E

Component System description

CAN controller It controls CAN communication signal transmission and reception, error detection, etc.

Transceiver ICIt converts digital signal into CAN communication signal, and CAN communication signal into digital signal.

Noise filter It eliminates noise of CAN communication signal.

Termination circuit*

(Resistance of approx. 120 Ω)It produces potential difference.


AN

DIAG ON CAN[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


DIAG ON CAN


“Diag on CAN” is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2 communicationlines, between control units and diagnosis unit.


SKIB8714E

Name Harness Description

DDL1TxRx

It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)

DDL2 K-LINE It is used for trouble diagnosis. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)

Diag on CANCAN-HCAN-L

It is used for trouble diagnosis and control.


[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS


TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Condition of Error Detection INFOID:0000000004457691

“U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication signal isnot transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR• CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)• CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)• Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line

WHEN “U1000” OR “U1001” IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ISNORMAL• Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit

and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may bedetected.)

• Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.• Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition

switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).• Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication,

malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).• Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.NOTE:CAN communication system is normal if “U1000” or “U1001” is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of CON-SULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each unit.

Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System INFOID:0000000004457692

In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit cannot transmitand receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control unitsrelated to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode.

ERROR EXAMPLENOTE:• Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring.• Refer to LAN-23, "Abbreviation List" for the unit abbreviation.

Example: TCM branch line open circuit

SKIB8738E

Unit name Symptom

ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.

BCM Reverse warning chime does not sound.


AN

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit

NOTE:• When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals

are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit.• The model (all units on CAN communication system are Diag on CAN) cannot perform CAN diagnosis with

CONSULT-III if the following error occurs. The error is judged by the symptom.

EPS control unit Normal operation.

Combination meter• Shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.• Warning lamps turn ON.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Normal operation.

TCM No impact on operation.

IPDM E/R Normal operation.

Unit name Symptom

SKIB8739E

Unit name Symptom

ECM

Normal operation.

BCM

EPS control unit

Combination meter

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

TCM

IPDM E/R

Error Difference of symptom

Data link connector branch line open circuit Normal operation.

CAN-H, CAN-L harness short-circuitMost of the units which are connected to the CAN communication system enter fail-safe mode or are deactivated.



< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit

Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit

SKIB8740E

Unit name Symptom

ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.

BCM• Reverse warning chime does not sound.• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wip-

er switch being in the intermittent position.

EPS control unit The steering effort increases.

Combination meter• The shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.• The speedometer is inoperative.• The odo/trip meter stops.



IPDM E/RWhen the ignition switch is ON,• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.• The cooling fan continues to rotate.

SKIB8741E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT-III INFOID:0000000004457693

CAN diagnosis on CONSULT-III extracts the root cause by receiving the following information.• Response to the system call• Control unit diagnosis information• Self-diagnosis• CAN diagnostic support monitor

Self-Diagnosis INFOID:0000000004457694

CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor INFOID:0000000004457695

MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III)

Unit name Symptom

ECM• Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.• Engine speed drops.

BCM

• Reverse warning chime does not sound.• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front

wiper switch being in the intermittent position.• The room lamp does not turn ON.• The engine does not start (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the igni-

tion switch OFF.)• The steering lock does not release (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning

the ignition switch OFF.)

EPS control unit The steering effort increases.

Combination meter• The tachometer and the speedometer do not move.• Warning lamps turn ON.• Indicator lamps do not turn ON.



IPDM E/RWhen the ignition switch is ON,• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.• The cooling fan continues to rotate.

DTCSelf-diagnosis item

(CONSULT-III indication)DTC detection condition Inspection/Action

U0101 LOST COMM (TCM)When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) from TCM for 2 seconds or more.

Start the inspection. Re-fer to the applicable sec-tion of the indicated control unit.

U0164 LOST COMM (HVAC)

When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) from A/C auto amp. for 2 seconds or more.

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITWhen a control unit (except for ECM) is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more.

U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUITWhen ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more.

U1002 SYSTEM COMMWhen a control unit is not transmitting or receiv-ing CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or less.

U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN)When an error is detected during the initial diag-nosis for CAN controller of each control unit.

Replace the control unit indicating “U1010” or ”P0607”.P0607 ECM



< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication

Without PAST

With PAST

MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)NOTE:For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor.

JSMIA0015GB

Item PRSNT Description

Initial diagnosisOK Normal at present

NG Control unit error (Except for some control units)

Transmission diagnosis

OK Normal at present

UNKWNUnable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more.

Diagnosis not performed

Control unit name(Reception diagnosis)

OK Normal at present

UNKWN

Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more.

Diagnosis not performed

No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)

Item PRSNT PAST Description

Transmission diagnosisOK

OK Normal at present and in the past

1 – 39Normal at present, but unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles from OFF to ON.)

UNKWN 0 Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more at present.

Control unit name(Reception diagnosis)

OK

OK Normal at present and in the past

1 – 39Normal at present, but unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles from OFF to ON.)

UNKWN 0 Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more at present.

– –Diagnosis not performed.



AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Example: Vehicle Display

How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000004457696

The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for detectingthe root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit.

ItemResult indi-

catedError counter Description

CAN_COMM(Initial diagnosis)

OK 0 Normal at present

NG 1 – 50Control unit error(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.)

CAN_CIRC_1(Transmission diagnosis)


UNKWN 1 – 50Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present.(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.)

CAN_CIRC_2 – 9(Reception diagnosis of each unit)


UNKWN 1 – 50

Unable to transmit for 2 seconds or more at present.(The number indicates how many times diagnosis has been run.)

Diagnosis not performed.


SKIB8715E


[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW



Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart INFOID:0000000004457697

Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004457698

INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMERInterview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and tounderstand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis.

Points in interview• What: Parts name, system name• When: Date, Frequency• Where: Road condition, Place• In what condition: Driving condition/environment• Result: SymptomNOTE:• Check normal units as well as error symptoms.- Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates

tachometer functions normally.• When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into fail-

safe mode.

JSMIA0016GB


AN

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< BASIC INSPECTION >• Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to

the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.

INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITIONCheck whether the symptom is reproduced or not.NOTE:Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error maytemporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.

CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment.NOTE:• This chart is used if CONSULT-III does not automatically recognize CAN system type.• There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available sys-

tem types, either style A or style B may be used.

CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)NOTE:

SKIB8717E



< BASIC INSPECTION >CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.

CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)NOTE:

JSMIA0017GB


AN

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< BASIC INSPECTION >CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.

CREATE INTERVIEW SHEETFill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interviewsheet.

JSMIA0018GB



< BASIC INSPECTION >Interview Sheet (Example)

DETECT THE ROOT CAUSECAN diagnosis function of CONSULT-III detects the root cause.

JSMIA0019GB


AN

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALHOW TO USE THIS SECTION

Caution INFOID:0000000004457699

• This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle and inspection procedures.• For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure".

Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000004457700

Unit name abbreviations in CONSULT-III CAN diagnosis and in this section are as per the following list.

Abbreviation Unit name

4WD AWD control unit

A-BAG Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

ABS ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

ADP Driver seat control unit

AFS AFS control unit

AV AV control unit

BCM BCM

DLC Data link connector

ECM ECM

ICC ICC sensor integrated unit

IPDM-E IPDM E/R

M&A Unified meter and A/C amp.

PSB Pre-crash seat belt control unit

RAS 4WAS main control unit

STRG Steering angle sensor

TCM TCM


[CAN]PRECAUTIONS

< PRECAUTION >












Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000004457703

CAUTION:• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when

checking the harness.


AN

PRECAUTIONS[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< PRECAUTION >

Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000004457704

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.NOTE:A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.NOTE:Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. Thespliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twistedline are lost.

• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-tion line.

SKIB8766E

SKIB8767E


[CAN]DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW



Interview Sheet INFOID:0000000004457705

SKIB8898E


AN

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONCAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

CAN System Specification Chart INFOID:0000000004457706

Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart.NOTE:Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" for how to use CAN system specification chart.

×: Applicable

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATIONNOTE:Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.

CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000004457707

Refer to LAN-17, "How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart" for how to use CAN communication signalchart.NOTE:Refer to LAN-23, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units.

T: Transmit R: Receive

Body type Coupe

Axle 2WD AWD

Engine VQ37VHR

Transmission M/T A/T

Brake control VDC

4WAS × × × ×

ICC system × × × × ×

CAN system type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

JPMIA0497GB

Signal name/Connecting unit

EC

M

4WD

AV

BC

M

PS

B

TC

M

AF

S

M&

A

ST

RG

AD

P

RA

S

AB

S

ICC

IPD

M-E

A/C compressor request signal T R

Accelerator pedal position signal T R R R R

ASCD OD cancel request signal T R

ASCD operation signal T R

ASCD status signal T R

ASCD SET indicator signal T R


[CAN]CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


Closed throttle position signal T R R

Cooling fan speed request signal T R

Engine and A/T integrated control signalT R

R T

Engine coolant temperature signal T R

Engine speed signal T R R R R R R R

Engine status signal T R R

Fuel consumption monitor signal T R R

ICC brake switch signal T R

ICC prohibition signal T R

ICC steering switch signal T R

Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal T R

Park/neutral position switch signal*1 T R

Power generation command value signal T R

Snow mode switch signalT R R

R T

Stop lamp switch signal

T R

R T R

T R

Wide open throttle position signal T R

AWD signal T R

AWD warning lamp signal T R

A/C switch/indicator signalT R

R T

A/C switch operation signal T R

Rear window defogger switch signal T R

System setting signalT R

R T

Voice recognition signal*2 T R

Buzzer output signalT R

R T

Door switch signal T R R R

Door unlock signal T R

Front fog light request signal T R R

Front wiper request signal T R R

High beam request signal T R R

Horn reminder signal T R

Ignition switch ON signalT R

R T

Ignition switch signal T R

Interlock/PNP switch signalT R

R T


EC

M

4WD

AV

BC

M

PS

B

TC

M

AF

S

M&

A

ST

RG

AD

P

RA

S

AB

S

ICC

IPD

M-E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


Key ID signal T R

Key switch signal T R

Key warning lamp signal T R

Low beam request signal T R

Meter display signalT R

R T

Oil pressure switch signalT R

R T

Position light request signal T R R

Rear window defogger control signalT R

R R R T

Sleep wake up signal T R R R

Starter control relay signal T R

Starter relay status signalR T

T R

Starting mode signal T R

Steering lock relay signalR T

T R

Theft warning horn request signal T R

Tire pressure signal T R

Trunk switch signal T R

Turn indicator signal T R

A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R R

A/T self-diagnosis signal R T

Current gear position signal T R R

Input speed signal R T R

Manual mode indicator signal T R R

N range signal R T R

Output shaft revolution signal R T R

P range signal R T R R

R range signal T R

Shift position signal R*3 T R R R R R

AFS OFF indicator lamp signal T R

A/C evaporator temperature signal R T

A/C switch signal R T

Blower fan motor switch signal R T

Distance to empty signal R T

Fuel level low warning signal R T

Fuel level sensor signal R T

Manual mode shift down signal R T

Manual mode shift up signal R T

Manual mode signal R T

Not manual mode signal R T


EC

M

4WD

AV

BC

M

PS

B

TC

M

AF

S

M&

A

ST

RG

AD

P

RA

S

AB

S

ICC

IPD

M-E




*1: M/T models only

*2: Models with NAVI

*3: Receive reverse position signal only

Odometer signal R T

Paddle shifter shift down signal*4 R T

Paddle shifter shift up signal*4 R T

Parking brake switch signal R R T

Seat belt buckle switch signal R T

Sleep-ready signalR T

R T

Target A/C evaporator temperature signal R T

Vehicle speed signalR R R R R R T R R

R R R R T R

Wake up signal R T

Steering angle sensor signal R T R R

4WAS signal T R

4WAS warning lamp signal R T

A/T shift schedule change demand signal R T

ABS malfunction signal T R

ABS operation signal R T R

ABS warning lamp signal R T

Brake pressure control signal T R

Brake warning lamp signal R T

Side G sensor signal R T

SLIP indicator lamp signal R T

TCS malfunction signal T R

TCS operation signal T R

VDC malfunction signal R T R

VDC OFF indicator lamp signal R T

VDC OFF switch signal T R

VDC operation signal T R

Deceleration degree commandment value signal

R T

ICC operation signal R T

ICC warning lamp signal R T

A/C compressor feedback signal R R T

Detention switch signal R R T

Front wiper stop position signal R T

High beam status signal R R T

Hood switch signal R T

Low beam status signal R R T

Push-button ignition switch status signal R T

Steering lock unit status signal R T


EC

M

4WD

AV

BC

M

PS

B

TC

M

AF

S

M&

A

ST

RG

AD

P

RA

S

AB

S

ICC

IPD

M-E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >*4: Models with paddle shifter

NOTE:CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted.




DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISCAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


1. BCM M122 2. IPDM E/R E6 3. Pre-crash seat belt control unit M110

4. AWD control unit F108 5. ECM M107 6. AV control unit M85: Without NAVIM87: With NAVI

7. Unified meter and A/C amp. M67 8. ICC sensor integrated unit E67 9. ABS actuator and electric unit (con-trol unit) E41

10. AFS control unit M16 11. Data link connector M24 12. Steering angle sensor M37

13. A/T assembly F51 14. Driver seat control unit B503 15. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit M147

16. 4WAS main control unit B54

JPMIA1313ZZ


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


Wiring Diagram - CAN SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004457709

JCMWM3052GB




JCMWM3053GB


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


JCMWM3054GB




JCMWM3055GB


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


JCMWM3056GB




JCMWM3057GB


AN

MALFUNCTION AREA CHART[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


MALFUNCTION AREA CHART

Main Line INFOID:0000000004457710

Branch Line INFOID:0000000004457711

Short Circuit INFOID:0000000004457712

Malfunction Area Reference

Main line between AV control unit and data link connector LAN-40, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Main line between data link connector and driver seat control unit LAN-41, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Main line between driver seat control unit and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

LAN-42, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Main line between driver seat control unit and 4WAS main control unit


Main line between 4WAS main control unit and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)



ECM branch line circuit LAN-47, "Diagnosis Procedure"

AWD control unti branch line circuit LAN-48, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit branch line circuit LAN-49, "Diagnosis Procedure"

AV control unit branch line circuit LAN-50, "Diagnosis Procedure"

BCM branch line circuit LAN-51, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Pre-crash seat belt control unit LAN-52, "Diagnosis Procedure"

TCM branch line circuit LAN-53, "Diagnosis Procedure"

AFS control unit branch line circuit LAN-54, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Data link connector branch line circuit LAN-55, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Unified meter and A/C amp. branch line circuit LAN-56, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Steering angle sensor branch line circuit LAN-57, "Diagnosis Procedure"

Driver seat control unit branch line circuit LAN-58, "Diagnosis Procedure"

4WAS main control unit branch line circuit LAN-59, "Diagnosis Procedure"

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line circuit LAN-60, "Diagnosis Procedure"

ICC sensor integrated unit branch line circuit LAN-61, "Diagnosis Procedure"

IPDM E/R branch line circuit LAN-62, "Diagnosis Procedure"


CAN communication circuit LAN-63, "Diagnosis Procedure"


[CAN]MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT


MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT


1.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Disconnect the following harness connectors.- ECM- AV control unit4. Check the continuity between the AV control unit harness connector and the data link connector.- With NAVI

- Without NAVI

Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the AV control unit and the data link connec-

tor. NO >> Repair the main line between the AV control unit and the data link connector.

AV control unit harness connector Data link connectorContinuity

Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.

M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side

and harness side).- Harness connector M7- Harness connector B1Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the harness connectors M7 and B1.2. Check the continuity between the data link connector and the harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the main line between the data link connector and the harness connector M7.


Check the continuity between the harness connector terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the data link connector and the driver seat

control unit. NO >> Repair the main line between the harness connector B1 and the driver seat control unit.

Data link connector Harness connectorContinuity


M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed

Connector No. Terminal No. Continuity

B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


[CAN]MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIRCUIT


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR


and harness side).- Harness connector B1- Harness connector M7- Harness connector M6- Harness connector E106Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the harness connectors B1 and M7.2. Check the continuity between the harness connector terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the main line between the driver seat control unit and the harness connector B1.


1. Disconnect the harness connectors M6 and E106.2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair the main line between the harness connectors M7 and M6.


1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).2. Check the continuity between the harness connector and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the driver seat control unit and the ABS actu-

ator and electric unit (control unit).


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed

Harness connector Harness connectorContinuity


M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed

Harness connectorABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

harness connector Continuity


E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >NO >> Repair the main line between the harness connector E106 and the ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit).


[CAN]MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT


MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT



1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Disconnect the harness connectors M7 and B1.4. Check the continuity between the harness connector terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the driver seat control unit and the 4WAS

main control unit. NO >> Repair the main line between the driver seat control unit and the 4WAS main control unit.


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR





Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the main line between the 4WAS main control unit and the harness connector B1.






harness connector.

Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the 4WAS main control unit and the ABS

actuator and electric unit (control unit).


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed


[CAN]MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIRCUIT


(control unit).


AN

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and

connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect the connector of ECM.2. Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the ECM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-16, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING

CONTROL UNIT (ECM) : Special Repair Requirement".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

ECM harness connectorResistance (Ω)

Connector No. Terminal No.

M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


[CAN]4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and con-

nector side).- AWD control unit connector- Harness connector F103- Harness connector M116Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of AWD control unit.2. Check the resistance between the AWD control unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the AWD control unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AWD control unit. Refer to DLN-27, "Diagnosis Proce-dure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the AWD control unit. Refer to DLN-53, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AWD control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

AWD control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


F108 8 16 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-5, "Work Flow".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace the main harness.NO >> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.


[CAN]AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit

side and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of AV control unit.2. Check the resistance between the AV control unit harness connector terminals.- Models with NAVI

- Models without NAVI

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the AV control unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AV control unit. Refer to the following.• Base audio without navigation: AV-39, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure"• BOSE audio without navigation: AV-162, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure"• BOSE audio with navigation: AV-438, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure"Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the AV control unit. Refer to the following.

• Base audio without navigation: AV-111, "Exploded View"• BOSE audio without navigation: AV-348, "Exploded View"• BOSE audio with navigation: AV-616, "Exploded View"

YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AV control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

AV control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and



1. Disconnect the connector of BCM.2. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the BCM branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-39, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

BCM harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the pre-crash seat belt for damage, bend and loose connection

(unit side and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of pre-crash seat belt control unit.2. Check the resistance between the pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the pre-crash seat belt control unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer to SBC-24, "Diag-nosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the pre-crash seat belt control unit. Refer to SBC-37, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the pre-crash seat belt control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Pre-crash seat belt control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR


nector side).- A/T assembly- Harness connector F103- Harness connector M116Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of A/T assembly.2. Check the resistance between the A/T assembly harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the TCM branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to TM-228, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to TM-105, "Component Parts Location".

(Replace A/T assembly if control valve with TCM is not listed in the latest parts list.)YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the TCM branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

A/T assembly harness connectorResistance (Ω)


F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AFS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit



1. Disconnect the connector of AFS control unit.2. Check the resistance between the AFS control unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the AFS control unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AFS control unit. Refer to EXL-62, "AFS CONTROLUNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the AFS control unit. Refer to EXL-199, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AFS control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

AFS control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection

(connector side and harness side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.NO >> Repair the data link connector branch line.

Data link connectorResistance (Ω)


M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the unified meter and A/C amp. for damage, bend and loose con-

nection (unit side and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of unified meter and A/C amp.2. Check the resistance between the unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the unified meter and A/C amp. branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-50, "UNIFIEDMETER AND A/C AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-127, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the unified meter and A/C amp. branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Unified meter and A/C amp. harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection



1. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor.2. Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the steering angle sensor branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-83, "Wiring Dia-gram - BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-105, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Steering angle sensor harness connectorResistance (Ω)


M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR


nector side).- Models with automatic drive positioner• Driver seat control unit• Harness connector B502• Harness connector B11- Models without automatic drive positioner• Driver seat control unit• Harness connector B501• Harness connector B10Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit.2. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the driver seat control unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-64, "DRIVER SEATCONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-230, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Driver seat control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the 4WAS main control unit for damage, bend and loose connec-

tion (unit side and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of 4WAS main control unit.2. Check the resistance between the 4WAS main control unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace the body harness.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the 4WAS main control unit. Refer to STC-135, "DiagnosisProcedure (4WAS Main Control Unit)".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the 4WAS main control unit. Refer to STC-180, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the 4WAS main control unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

4WAS main control unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


B54 1 8 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend

and loose connection (unit side and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector termi-

nals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer toBRC-37, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-102, "Exploded

View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connectorResistance (Ω)


E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ICC sensor integrated unit for damage, bend and loose con-



1. Disconnect the connector of ICC sensor integrated unit.2. Check the resistance between the ICC sensor integrated unit harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the ICC sensor integrated unit branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-102, "Diagno-sis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the ICC sensor integrated unit. Refer to CCS-131, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ICC sensor integrated unit branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

ICC sensor integrated unit harness connectorResistance (Ω)


E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN]IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side

and connector side).Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.


1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.2. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.


Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-17, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Exploded View".YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

IPDM E/R harness connectorResistance (Ω)


E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT[CAN]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT


1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Check the harness and repair the root cause.


Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.


4.CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT

1. Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R.2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.

3. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals.

Is the measurement value within the specification?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview withcustomer)” are reproduced.

Data link connectorContinuity


M24 6 14 Not existed

Data link connector

Ground

ContinuityConnector No. Terminal No.

M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132

IPDM E/RResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E


[CAN]CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Inspection resultReproduced>>GO TO 6.Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is

detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.

NOTE:ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first.

4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced. NOTE:Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.

Inspection resultReproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISMAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT




- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND ABS CIRCUIT


(control unit).


AN

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT







AN

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)]CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT


detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L









B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN RAS AND ABS CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


(control unit).


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L







[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)]RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B54 1 8 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)]AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)]ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


detected.







[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT









B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B54 1 8 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


detected.







[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN AV AND DLC CIRCUIT






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND ADP CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)]MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT









B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)]RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B54 1 8 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)]TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

AFS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN

MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND RAS CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L









B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


(control unit).


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)]ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L











1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)]PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN

RAS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8)]

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B54 1 8 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)]4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










F108 8 16 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L











1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9)]TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L
















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E




detected.







AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L






- Without NAVI





M8752

M246 Existed

53 14 Existed



M8586

M246 Existed

87 14 Existed






1.CHECK CONNECTOR












M246

M720 Existed

14 21 Existed


B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











harness connector.




B120 22 Existed

21 23 Existed



M722

M69 Existed

23 8 Existed




E1069

E4135 Existed

8 14 Existed




(control unit).


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











M107 114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)]4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










F108 8 16 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L











1.CHECK CONNECTOR













M87 52 53 Approx. 54 – 66



M85 86 87 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M122 91 90 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)]PSB BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M110 24 22 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR











F51 3 8 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M16 30 7 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR








M24 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M67 56 72 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










M37 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66






1.CHECK CONNECTOR










B503 3 19 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR





nals.







E41 35 14 Approx. 54 – 66


[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10)]ICC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E67 3 6 Approx. 54 – 66


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L




1.CHECK CONNECTOR










E6 40 39 Approx. 108 – 132


















5.CHECK SYMPTOM





Data link connector

Ground


M246 Not existed

14 Not existed

ECMResistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

114 113 Approx. 108 – 132


Terminal No.

40 39 Approx. 108 – 132

LKIA0037E


AN


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

B

A

O

P

N

L


detected.







ENGINE

C

D

E

SECTION LUA

LU

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONTENTS


DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2Engine Lubrication System ......................................2Engine Lubrication System Schematic ......................2

PRECAUTION ............................................... 3

PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3Liquid Gasket ...........................................................3

PREPARATION ............................................ 4

PREPARATION ................................................... 4Special Service Tools ..............................................4Commercial Service Tools .......................................4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 6

ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 6Inspection ..................................................................6Draining .....................................................................8Refilling .....................................................................8

OIL FILTER ......................................................... 9Removal and Installation ...........................................9Inspection ................................................................10


OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD) .........................11Exploded View .........................................................11Removal and Installation .........................................11Inspection ................................................................12

OIL PUMP .........................................................13Exploded View .........................................................13Removal and Installation .........................................13Inspection ................................................................13

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ....14

OIL PUMP .........................................................14Disassembly ............................................................14Assembly .................................................................14Inspection ................................................................14

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................16

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................16

Periodical Maintenance Specification ....................16Engine Oil Pressure ...............................................16Oil Pump .................................................................16Regulator Valve ......................................................16

LU-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONDESCRIPTION

Engine Lubrication System INFOID:0000000004250538

Engine Lubrication System Schematic INFOID:0000000004250539

JPBIA2340GB

JPBIA2341GB


PRECAUTIONS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O

< PRECAUTION >

L


Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000004250540

LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE1. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.

• Remove liquid gasket completely from the liquid gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and boltholes.

2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heatinguse) to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.

3. Apply liquid gasket to the liquid gasket application surface.Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Prod-ucts and Sealants".• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.• Do not retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant.


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >





Description

ST25051001(J-25695-1)Oil pressure gauge

Measuring oil pressureMaximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25

kg/cm2, 356 psi)

ST25052000(J-25695-2)Hose

Adapting oil pressure gauge to oil pan (upper)

KV10115801(J-38956)Oil filter wrench

Removing and installing oil filtera: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)

NT050

S-NT559

S-NT375


Tube presser Pressing tube of liquid gasket

NT052


PREPARATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O

< PREPARATION >

L

Power tools Loosening nuts and bolts

Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch 27 mm (1.06 in)


PBIC0190E

PBIC4066E


ENGINE OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCEENGINE OIL

Inspection INFOID:0000000004250543

ENGINE OIL LEVELNOTE:Before starting engine, put vehicle horizontally and check the engine oil level. If engine is already started, stopit and allow 10 minutes before checking.1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.2. Insert oil level gauge and check the engine oil level is within the

range (A) shown in the figure.3. If it is out of range, adjust it.

NOTE:When checking the engine oil level, insert oil level gauge (1)with its tip aligned with oil level gauge guide.

ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE• Check engine oil for white turbidity or heavy contamination.• If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.

Repair or replace damaged parts.

ENGINE OIL LEAKAGECheck for engine oil leakage around the following areas:• Oil pans (upper and lower)• Oil pan drain plug• Oil pressure switch• Oil temperature sensor• Oil filter• Valve timing control cover• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover• Mating surface between front timing chain case and rear timing chain case• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder head• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder block• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and oil pan (upper)• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head• Mating surface between lower cylinder block and cylinder block• Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear)• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and exhaust valve timing control position sensor

OIL PRESSURE CHECK

JPBIA0070ZZ

2 : Engine cover

: Engine front

JPBIA0071ZZ


ENGINE OIL

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O


L

WARNING:• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.• Oil pressure check should be done in “Neutral position” (M/T models) or “Parking position” (A/T

models).1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".2. Remove engine undercover with power tool.3. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch, and remove oil pressure switch using deep socket

(commercial service tool).CAUTION:Never drop or shock oil pressure switch.• 2WD models (A)

• AWD models (A)

4. Install the oil pressure gauge [SST: ST25051001 (J-25695-1)](A) and hose [SST: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)] (B).

5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.6. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.

NOTE:When the engine oil temperature is low, the engine oil pressure becomes high.

If difference is extreme, check engine oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leakage.7. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and the mating surface.b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification.

Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Prod-ucts and Sealants".

1 : Oil pressure switch

: Engine front

JPBIA0251GB

1 : Oil pressure switch

2 : Front final drive

: Engine front

JPBIA1911ZZ

JPBIA0074ZZ

Engine oil pressure : Refer to LU-16, "Engine Oil Pressure".


ENGINE OIL
c. After warming up engine, check there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.

Draining INFOID:0000000004250544

WARNING:• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin

contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-6, "Inspec-tion".

2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.3. Loosen oil filler cap.4. Remove undercover with power tool. 5. Remove drain plug and then drain engine oil.

Refilling INFOID:0000000004250545

1. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View (2WD)".CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.

2. Refill with new engine oil.Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

CAUTION:• When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge.• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifica-

tions for reference only.• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.

3. Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage.4. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.5. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".

Tightening torque : Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View (2WD)".


Engine oil capacity : Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".


OIL FILTER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O


L

OIL FILTER


REMOVALCAUTION:• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.• Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.• Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.• Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.1. Remove engine undercover with power tool.2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (B), remove

oil filter.

INSTALLATION1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.

A : 2WD models

: Engine front

JPBIA0252GB

A : AWD models

: Engine front

JPBIA1828ZZ

SMA010


OIL FILTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,
then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification.


INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".2. Start the engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil.3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.4. Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".

Oil filter:

: 17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

JPBIA0077ZZ


OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O


L

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONOIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)



REMOVALWARNING:Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.1. Remove engine undercover with power tool.2. Using the oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)], remove oil filter. Refer to LU-9, "Removal and

Installation".CAUTION:Never spill engine oil on drive belt.

3. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector and oil temperature sensor harness connector.4. Remove oil filter bracket from oil pan (upper).5. Remove oil pressure switch and oil temperature sensor from oil filter bracket.

INSTALLATION• Install oil pressure switch as follows:- Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil filter bracket.- Apply liquid gasket and install oil pressure switch.

1. Oil pan (upper) 2. Gasket 3. Oil temperature sensor

4. Oil pressure switch 5. Oil filter bracket 6. Connector bolt

7. Oil filter

A. Refer to LU-9

: Engine front


JPBIA1829GB


OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-17, "Recommended Chemical Productsand Sealants".


INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION1. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".2. Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.4. Check the engine oil level again. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".


OIL PUMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O


L

OIL PUMP



REMOVAL1. Remove oil pan (upper and lower) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View (2WD)" and EM-82,

"2WD : Exploded View" (2WD models) or EM-44, "Exploded View (AWD)" and EM-85, "AWD : ExplodedView" (AWD models).

2. Remove front timing chain case and timing chain (primary). Refer to EM-50, "Exploded View".3. Remove oil pump assembly.

INSTALLATIONCAUTION:Before installation, apply new engine oil to the parts as instructed in the figure.Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• When installing, align crankshaft flat faces with oil pump inner rotor flat faces.


INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".2. Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.4. Check the engine oil level and adjust the level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".

1. Oil pump body 2. Oil pump outer rotor 3. Oil pump inner rotor

4. Oil pump cover 5. Regulator valve plug 6. Regulator valve spring

7. Regulator valve spring 8. Regulator valve


JPBIA0242GB


OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLYOIL PUMP

Disassembly INFOID:0000000004250554

1. Remove oil pump cover.2. Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body.3. After removing regulator valve plug, remove regulator valve spring and regulator valve.

Assembly INFOID:0000000004250555

Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.• Install oil pump inner rotor with the groove faced to oil pump cover

side.


INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Oil Pump Clearance• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge (C).- Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body [posi-

tion (B)]

- Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outerrotor [position (A)]

• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge (A).- Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body

[position (C)]

- Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body[position (B)]

• Calculate the clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body as follows:

OIL PUMP BODY INNER DIAMETER

A : Oil pump body side

B : Oil pump cover side

C : Groove

JPBIA0084ZZ

Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".


JPBIA0078ZZ



JPBIA0079ZZ


OIL PUMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

U

N

P

O

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

L

- Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside microme-ter. [position (A)]

OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR OUTER DIAMETER- Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of oil pump inner

rotor (1) with micrometer. [position (B)]

OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR TO OIL PUMP BODY CLEARANCE- (Clearance) = (Oil pump body inner diameter) – (Oil pump inner rotor outer diameter)

• If measured/calculated values are out of the standard, replace oil pump assembly.

Regulator Valve Clearance(Clearance) = (Regulator valve hole diameter) – (Regulator valveouter diameter)

• If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace oil pumpassembly.

CAUTION:• Coat regulator valve with engine oil.• Check that it falls smoothly into valve hole by its own weight.

JPBIA0080ZZ


1 : Regulator valve

2 : Oil pump body

Standard : Refer to LU-16, "Regulator Valve".

JPBIA0081ZZ



Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000004250557

ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)Unit: (US qt, lmp qt)

Engine Oil Pressure INFOID:0000000004250558

Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

*: Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)

Oil Pump INFOID:0000000004250559

Unit: mm (in)

Regulator Valve INFOID:0000000004250560

Unit: mm (in)

Drain and refill With oil filter change 4.9 (5-1/8, 4-1/4)

Without oil filter change 4.6 (4-7/8, 4)

Dry engine (Overhaul) 5.7 (6, 5)

Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure*

Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14)

2,000 rpm More than 294 (3.0, 43)

Oil pump body to oil pump outer rotor radial clearance 0.114 - 0.260 (0.0045 - 0.0102)

Oil pump inner rotor to oil pump outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.180 (0.0071)

Oil pump body to oil pump inner rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)

Oil pump body to oil pump outer rotor axial clearance 0.030 - 0.090 (0.0012 - 0.0035)

Oil pump inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)

Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)


MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

BSECTION MA

A

MAINTENANCE

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

N

O

CONTENTS

M

PREPARATION ............................................ 3

PREPARATION ................................................... 3Special Service Tool .................................................3Commercial Service Tool ..........................................3


GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................ 4Explanation of General Maintenance ........................4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ................................ 6Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ........................6Schedule 1 ................................................................6Schedule 2 ................................................................8

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRI-CANTS ................................................................10

Fluids and Lubricants ..............................................10Engine Oil Recommendation ..................................10Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio ..........................11

ENGINE MAINTENANCE ...................................12

DRIVE BELT ..............................................................12DRIVE BELT : Exploded View ................................12DRIVE BELT : Checking .........................................12DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment ........................12

ENGINE COOLANT ...................................................12ENGINE COOLANT : Draining ................................12ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling ................................13ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing ...............................15

FUEL LINES ..............................................................15FUEL LINES : Inspection ........................................16

AIR CLEANER FILTER .............................................16AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation

....16

ENGINE OIL ..............................................................16ENGINE OIL : Draining ...........................................16

ENGINE OIL : Refilling ............................................17

OIL FILTER ................................................................17OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation ...................17OIL FILTER : Inspection ..........................................18

SPARK PLUG ............................................................18SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation ...............18SPARK PLUG : Inspection ......................................19

EVAP VAPOR LINES ................................................19EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection ...........................19

CHASSIS MAINTENANCE ...............................20

EXHAUST SYSTEM ...................................................20EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection ............................20

GEAR OIL ..................................................................20GEAR OIL : Inspection ............................................20GEAR OIL : Draining ...............................................20GEAR OIL : Refilling ................................................20

CLUTCH FLUID .........................................................21CLUTCH FLUID : Inspection ...................................21

TRANSFER FLUID ....................................................21TRANSFER FLUID : Inspection ..............................21TRANSFER FLUID : Draining .................................21TRANSFER FLUID : Refilling ..................................22

FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT: 2S56A ......................22FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT: 2S56A : Inspec-tion ...........................................................................22

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A ........................22REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A : Inspection ....23

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A-R ....................23REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A-R : Inspec-tion ...........................................................................23

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3F80A-1VL107 ...........24

MA-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3F80A-1VL107 : In-spection .................................................................. 24

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A ............ 24FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : In-spection .................................................................. 24FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : Draining .................................................................. 25FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : Re-filling ....................................................................... 25

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 ................ 25REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Inspec-tion .......................................................................... 25REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Drain-ing ........................................................................... 26REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Refill-ing ........................................................................... 26

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V .............. 26REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : In-spection .................................................................. 26REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : Draining .................................................................. 27REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : Refill-ing ........................................................................... 27

WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE) ..................... 27WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE) : Adjust-ment ........................................................................ 27

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS ........................ 30BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection ... 30

BRAKE LINES AND CABLES .................................. 30BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection ............. 30

BRAKE FLUID .......................................................... 30BRAKE FLUID : Changing ...................................... 30

DISC BRAKE ............................................................ 30DISC BRAKE : Inspection ...................................... 31DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake ............................ 31DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake ............................. 32

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ........................... 32STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection ...... 32

POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES .................. 32POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspec-tion .......................................................................... 33

AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS ........................... 33AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection ..... 33

DRIVE SHAFT ........................................................... 33DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection ..................................... 34

BODY MAINTENANCE ..................................... 35

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH ..................... 35LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricat-ing ........................................................................... 35

SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, AN-CHORS AND ADJUSTERS ...................................... 35

SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, AN-CHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection ................. 35

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......................................................... 36

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ................................................................. 36

DRIVE BELT .............................................................. 36DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt ........................................ 36

ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 36ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification .................... 36

ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 36ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification .................... 36

SPARK PLUG ........................................................... 36SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug .................................... 36

ROAD WHEEL .......................................................... 36ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel ................................. 36


PREPARATION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A

< PREPARATION >

M


Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000004246030


Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004246031


Description

KV10115801(J-38956)Oil filter wrench

Removing and installing oil filtera: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)

S-NT375


Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts

Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark pluga : 14 mm (0.55 in)

PBIC0190E

JPBIA0399ZZ


GENERAL MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCEGENERAL MAINTENANCE

Explanation of General Maintenance INFOID:0000000004246032

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operationof the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can performchecks and inspections themselves or have their INFINITI dealers do them.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLEThe maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

INSIDE THE VEHICLEThe maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle,etc.

Item Reference page

Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

WT-102

Wheel nuts When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary.

—

Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). If the vehicle is equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear, tires cannot be rotated.

MA-27

Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System (TPMS) transmitter compo-nents

Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

WT-99

Wheel alignment and balance

If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

FSU-8 (2WD)FSU-30 (AWD)

RSU-6MA-27

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.

—

Windshield wiper blades

Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. —

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors and the engine hood operate properly. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

MA-35

Lamps Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and oth-er lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis.

—

Item Reference page

Warning lamps and chimes

Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly. —

Windshield wiper and washer

Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

—

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

—

Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in)

—

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every po-sition. Check that the head restrains move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks.

—


GENERAL MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLEThe maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

MA-35

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

—

Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. —

Brake pedal and booster

Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

BR-8BR-14

Clutch pedal Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free play.

CL-5

Parking brake Check that the lever or pedal has the proper travel and make sure that the vehi-cle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied.

PB-3 (PEDAL TYPE)PB-4 (LEVER TYPE)

Automatic transmis-sion "Park" mecha-nism

Check that the lock release button on the selector lever operates properly and smoothly. On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the se-lector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

—

Item Reference page

Item Reference page

Windshield washer fluid

Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. —

Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. CO-7

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, de-terioration or loose connections.

—

Brake and clutch fluid levels

Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir.

MA-30MA-21

Battery Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require fre-quent checks of the battery fluid level.

PG-3

Engine drive belts Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-12

Engine oil level Check the level on the oil level gauge after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine.

LU-6

Power steering fluid level and lines

Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

MA-33

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the ex-haust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it.

MA-20

Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these sub-stances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate.

—

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately.

—


PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

Introduction of Periodic Maintenance INFOID:0000000004246033

Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions inwhich the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodicmaintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

Schedule 1 INFOID:0000000004246034

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMAbbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage interval only

Schedule 1

Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include one or more of the following driving conditions:• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures

remaining below freezing.• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.• Driving in dusty conditions.• Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.• Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

Emission Control Sys-tem Maintenance

MA-6Chassis and Body Maintenance

Schedule 2Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits.

Emission Control Sys-tem Maintenance

MA-8Chassis and Body Maintenance

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Reference Section - Page or -

Content Title

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, which-ever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

3.75(6)3

7.50(12)

6

11.25(18)

9

15(24)12

18.75(30)15

22.5(36)18

26.25(42)21

30(48)24

Drive belts NOTE (1) MA-12

Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) [R] MA-16

EVAP vapor lines I* MA-19

Fuel lines I* MA-16

Fuel filter NOTE (3) —

Engine coolant NOTE (4) MA-12

Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-16

Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.)

R R R R R R R R MA-17

Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type)

Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-18

Intake & exhaust valve clear-ance*

NOTE (5) EM-18


Content Title


Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

33.75(54)27

37.5(60)30

41.25(66)33

45(72)36

48.75(78)39

52.5(84)42

56.25(90)45

60(96)48

Drive belts NOTE (1) I* MA-12

Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) [R] MA-16

EVAP vapor lines I* MA-19

Fuel lines I* MA-16



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

NOTE:

(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section.

(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.

(5) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not performsuch maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals arerequired.

CHASSIS AND BODYAbbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.


Engine coolant NOTE (4) R* MA-12


Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.)


Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type)

Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-18


NOTE (5) EM-18


Content Title


Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

33.75(54)27

37.5(60)30

41.25(66)33

45(72)36

48.75(78)39

52.5(84)42

56.25(90)45

60(96)48

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Reference Section -

Page or - Con-tent Title


Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

3.75(6)3

7.50(12)

6

11.25(18)

9

15(24)12

18.75(30)15

22.5(36)18

26.25(42)21

30(48)24

Brake lines & cables I I MA-30

Brake pads & rotors I I I I MA-31

Manual transmission gear oil, transfer fluid & differential gear oil

NOTE (1) I I

MA-20MA-21MA-24MA-25MA-26

Automatic transmission fluid NOTE (2) —

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

I I I IMA-32MA-33

Tire rotation NOTE (3)MA-4MA-27

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD)

I I I I


Exhaust system I I I I MA-20

In-cabin microfilter R R VTL-9

Stop lamp switch & ASCD brake switch

NOTE (4) I I BR-8


NOTE:

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) fluid/oil at every30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.

(2) Automatic transmission fluid is maintenance-free.

(3) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.

(4) Inspect the clearance between the brake pedal and the switches.

Schedule 2 INFOID:0000000004246035

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMAbbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. [ ]: At the mileage interval only

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Reference Section - Page

or - Content Title


Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

33.75(54)27

37.5(60)30

41.25(66)33

45(72)36

48.75(78)39

52.5(84)42

56.25(90)45

60(96)48

Brake lines & cables I I MA-30



NOTE (1) I I




I I I IMA-32MA-33



I I I I


Exhaust system I I I I MA-20

In-cabin microfilter R R VTL-9


NOTE (4) I I BR-8

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALReference Sec-tion - Page or - Content Title

Perform at number of miles, kilo-meters or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

7.5(12)

6

15(24)12

22.5(36)18

30(48)24

37.5(60)30

45(72)36

52.5(84)42

60(96)48

Drive belts NOTE (1) I* MA-12

Air cleaner filter [R] [R] MA-16

EVAP vapor lines I* I* MA-19

Fuel lines I* I* MA-16


Engine coolant NOTE (3) R* MA-12


Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equiv-alent.)


Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-18


NOTE (4) EM-18



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

NOTE:

(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.

(2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section.

(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.

(4) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not performsuch maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals arerequired.

CHASSIS AND BODYAbbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.

NOTE:

(1) Automatic transmission fluid is maintenance-free.

(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.

(3) Inspect the clearance between the brake pedal and the switches.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALReference Sec-tion - Page or - Content Title

Perform at number of miles, kilo-meters or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

7.5(12)

6

15(24)12

22.5(36)18

30(48)24

37.5(60)30

45(72)36

52.5(84)42

60(96)48

Brake lines & cables I I I I MA-30



I I




I IMA-32MA-33



I I I I


Exhaust system I I MA-20

In-cabin microfilter R R R R VTL-9


NOTE (3) I I I I BR-8


RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000004246036

*1: For further details, see “Engine Oil Recommendation”.

*2: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Oil available at an INFINITI dealer.

*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability andautomatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI newvehicle limited warranty.

*4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).

*5: See an INFINITI dealer for service for synthetic oil.

*6: Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

*7: DEXRON™ VI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used.

*8: Available in mainland U.S.A. through an INFINITI dealer.

*9: The fluid capacity is the reference value.

Engine Oil Recommendation INFOID:0000000004246037

NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification and International Lubri-cant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsUS mea-sure

Imp mea-sure

Liter

Engine oilDrain and refill

With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.9• Engine oil with API Certification Mark*1, *2

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30*1, *2Without oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

Dry engine (Overhaul) 6 qt 5 qt 5.7

Cooling system

With reservoir tank

A/T 9 qt 7-1/2 qt 8.5Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant or equivalent

M/T 9-1/8 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.6

Reservoir tank 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid 10-7/8 qt*9 9-1/8 qt*9 10.3*9 Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*3

Manual trans-mission gear oil

VIN: UP to JNKCV64E09M605016

6-1/4 pt 5-1/8 pt 2.93 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90VIN: From

JNKCV64E09M6050176 pt 5 pt 2.83

Differential gear oil

Front 1-3/8 pt 1-1/8 pt 0.65Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity

SAE 80W-90*4

Rear 3 pt 2-1/2 pt 1.40Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Vis-

cosity SAE 75W-90*5

Transfer fluid 2-1/8 pt 1-3/4 pt 1.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*6

Power steering fluid (PSF) 1-1/8 qt 7/8 qt 1.0 Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*7

Brake and clutch fluid — — —Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake

Fluid*8 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Windshield washer fluid — — —Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Con-centrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Fuel recommendation — — — Refer to GI-31, "Fuel".



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality labelshould not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio INFOID:0000000004246038

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality,year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solutioncontains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional coolingsystem additives are not necessary.CAUTION:When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant or equivalent with theproper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralizedwater/distilled water.Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling sys-tem.

1. API certification mark 2. API service symbol

SAIA1514E

SMA947CA


ENGINE MAINTENANCE
ENGINE MAINTENANCEDRIVE BELT

DRIVE BELT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004667172

DRIVE BELT : Checking INFOID:0000000004667173

WARNING:Be sure to perform the this step when engine is stopped.• Check that the indicator (C) (notch on fixed side) of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the possible use range

(A).NOTE:• Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold.• When new drive belt is installed, the indicator (notch on fixed side) should be within the range (B) in the fig-

ure.• Visually check the entire drive belt for wear, damage or crack.• If the indicator (notch on fixed side) is out of the possible use range or belt is damaged, replace drive belt.

DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment INFOID:0000000004667174

Refer to MA-36, "DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt".ENGINE COOLANT

ENGINE COOLANT : Draining INFOID:0000000004667175

WARNING:• To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot.• Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a

quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way.

JPBIA1060ZZ

1. Power steering oil pump 2. Alternator 3. Drive belt auto-tensioner

4. Idler pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley 6. A/C compressor

7. Idler pulley 8. Drive belt 9. Idler pulley

A. Possible use range B. Range when new drive belt is installed C. Indicator

D. View D


ENGINE MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

1. Open radiator drain plug (2) at the bottom of radiator, and thenremove radiator cap.

When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Referto EM-79, "Setting".

2. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing. 3. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.

If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing".

ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling INFOID:0000000004667176

1. Remove air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".2. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.

CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-122, "Dis-assembly and Assembly".

3. Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.4. Remove air relief plug (2) on radiator left side.

5. Remove air relief plug (1) on heater hose.

1 : Engine under cover

A : Radiator drain plug hole

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0259ZZ

Tightening torque : Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".

1 : Reservoir tank

3 : Engine cover

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0260ZZ

2 : Heater hose

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0104ZZ


ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >6. Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level.
• Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neckslowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minuteto allow air in system to escape.

• Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent mixed with water (distilled or demineralized).Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

7. When engine coolant overflows air relief hole on radiator, installair relief plug with new O-ring.

8. Repeat step 6.9. When engine coolant overflows air relief hole on heater hose, install air relief plug with new O-ring. Then

refill radiator with engine coolant.

10. Install air cleaner case (LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".11. Install radiator cap.12. Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at

3,000 rpm.• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.CAUTION:Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.

13. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.

14. Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.15. Repeat steps 11 through 14 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no

longer drops. 16. Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.17. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to

3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”.• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.

18. Repeat step 17 three times.19. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 6, and steps from 11 to 18 until engine

coolant level no longer drops. 20. Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.

Engine coolant capacity : Refer to MA-36, "EN-GINE COOLANT : Periodical MaintenanceSpecification".

(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level) JPBIA0412ZZ

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity :Refer to MA-36, "ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification"(At “MAX” level)

A : MAX

B : MIN


JPBIA0102ZZ

: 1.2 N·m (0.12 kg-m, 11 in-lb)


ENGINE MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing INFOID:0000000004667177

1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.

If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-121,"Exploded View".

2. Remove air relief plug (1) on heater hose (2).

3. Remove air relief plug (2) on radiator.

4. Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief holes, then close air relief plugs. Fill radiator andreservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.

5. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.6. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.7. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.8. Drain water from the system. Refer to MA-12, "ENGINE COOLANT : Draining".9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.10. Check that the reservoir tank cap is tightened.

FUEL LINES


: Vehicle front

JPBIA0104ZZ

1 : Reservoir tank

3 : Engine cover

: Vehicle front

JPBIA0260ZZ



ENGINE MAINTENANCE
FUEL LINES : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667178

Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attach-ment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or dete-rioration.

If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.

AIR CLEANER FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004667179

REMOVAL1. Unhook clips (A).

2. Remove holder (3) from air cleaner case (2), and then removeair cleaner filter (1) from holder.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.• Install the air cleaner filter by aligning the seal with the notch of air cleaner case.ENGINE OIL

ENGINE OIL : Draining INFOID:0000000004667180

WARNING:• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin

contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-6, "Inspec-tion".

2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.3. Loosen oil filler cap.

A : Engine

B : Fuel line

C : Fuel tank

JPBIA0129ZZ

1 : Holder

2 : Air cleaner case

JPBIA1597ZZ

JPBIA1598ZZ


ENGINE MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

4. Remove undercover with power tool. 5. Remove drain plug and then drain engine oil.

ENGINE OIL : Refilling INFOID:0000000004667181

1. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to EM-43, "Exploded View (2WD)".CAUTION:Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.

2. Refill with new engine oil.Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

CAUTION:• When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge.• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifica-

tions for reference only.• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.

3. Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage.4. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.5. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".

OIL FILTER

OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004667182

REMOVALCAUTION:• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.• Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.• Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.• Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.1. Remove engine undercover with power tool.2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (B), remove

oil filter.


Engine oil capacity : Refer to MA-36, "ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification".

A : 2WD models

: Engine front

JPBIA0252GB


ENGINE MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.

3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification.

OIL FILTER : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667183

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".2. Start the engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil.3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.4. Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-6, "Inspection".

SPARK PLUG

SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004667184

REMOVAL1. Remove engine cover with power tool. Refer to EM-25, "Exploded View".2. Remove air cleaner case and air duct (RH and LH). Refer to EM-27, "Exploded View".3. Remove electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View".4. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-47, "Removal and Installation".

A : AWD models

: Engine front

JPBIA1828ZZ

SMA010

Oil filter:

: 17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

JPBIA0077ZZ


ENGINE MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

5. Remove spark plug with a spark plug wrench (commercial ser-vice tool).

INSTALLATIONInstallation is the reverse order of removal.

SPARK PLUG : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667185

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVALUse the standard type spark plug for normal condition.

CAUTION:• Never drop or shock spark plug.• Never use a wire brush for cleaning.• If plug tip is covered with carbon, use spark plug cleaner to

clean.

• Check and adjustment of plug gap is not required betweenchange intervals.

EVAP VAPOR LINES

EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246053

1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,chafing and deterioration.

2. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc.Refer to EC-615, "Inspection".

a : 14 mm (0.55 in)

JPBIA0030ZZ

Spark plug (Standard type) : Refer to MA-36, "SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug".

Cleaner air pressure

: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)Cleaning time

: Less than 20 secondsSMA773C

JPBIA0031ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
CHASSIS MAINTENANCEEXHAUST SYSTEM

EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667191

Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment,leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration.• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.

GEAR OIL

GEAR OIL : Inspection INFOID:0000000004691633

LEAKAGEMake sure that gear oil is not leaking from transmission or around it.

LEVEL1. Remove filler plug (1).2. Check oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the fig-

ure.CAUTION:Never start engine while checking oil level.

3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transmissioncase.CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-30,"Exploded View".

GEAR OIL : Draining INFOID:0000000004691634

1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up transmission.2. Stop the engine. Remove drain plug and then drain gear oil.3. Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to transmission case.

CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

4. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-30, "Exploded View".

GEAR OIL : Refilling INFOID:0000000004691635

1. Remove filler plug (1). Fill with new gear oil to transmission asshown in the figure.

2. After refilling gear oil, check oil level. Refer to MA-20, "GEAROIL : Inspection".

SMA211A

JPDIC0331ZZ

Oil grade and viscosity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Oil capacity : Refer to TM-98, "General Specifications".

JPDIC0331ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

3. Set a gasket on filler plug and then install it to transmission case.CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

4. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-30, "Exploded View".

CLUTCH FLUID

CLUTCH FLUID : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667195

CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified

range (MAX – MIN lines).• Visually check for any clutch fluid leakage around the reservoir

tank.• Check the clutch system for any leakage if the fluid level is

extremely low (lower than MIN).

TRANSFER FLUID

TRANSFER FLUID : Inspection INFOID:0000000004691636

FLUID LEAKAGECheck transfer surrounding area (oil seal, drain plug, and filler plug etc.) for fluid leakage.

FLUID LEVEL1. Remove filler plug (1) and gasket. Then check that fluid is filled

up from mounting hole for the filler plug.CAUTION:Never start engine while checking fluid level.

2. Set a new gasket onto filler plug, and install it on transfer andtighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-60, "ExplodedView".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

TRANSFER FLUID : Draining INFOID:0000000004691637

1. Run the vehicle to warm up the transfer unit sufficiently.2. Stop the engine, and remove the drain plug (1) to drain the

transfer fluid.3. Set a new gasket onto the drain plug, and install it on the trans-

fer and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-60,"Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

JPDIB0032ZZ

JPDIE0129ZZ

JPDIE0130ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
TRANSFER FLUID : Refilling INFOID:0000000004691638

1. Remove filler plug (1) and gasket. Then fill fluid up to mountinghole for the filler plug.

CAUTION:Carefully fill the fluid. (Fill up for approximately 3 minutes.)

2. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check the fluid level again.3. Set a new gasket onto filler plug, and install it on transfer and

tighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-60, "Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT: 2S56A

FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT: 2S56A : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667199

NOISECheck the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.

VIBRATIONIf vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runoutfirst.1. With a dial indicator, measure propeller shaft runout at runout

measuring points by rotating final drive companion flange withhands.

2. If runout still exceeds specifications, separate propeller shaft at final drive companion flange; then rotatecompanion flange 90, 180, 270 degrees and install propeller shaft.

3. Check runout again. If runout still exceeds specifications, replace propeller shaft assembly. 4. Check the vibration by driving vehicle.

RUNOUT MEASURING POINTPropeller shaft runout measuring point (Point “ ”).

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A

Fluid and viscosity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Fluid capacity : Refer to DLN-79, "General Specifications".

JPDIE0129ZZ

: Vehicle front

LimitPropeller shaft runout : Refer to DLN-86, "Propel-

ler Shaft Runout".JPDID0185ZZ

StandardA : 381.5 mm (15.02 in)

PDIA0768J


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667200

NOISE• Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.• If center bearing is noisy or damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.

VIBRATIONIf vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout first.1. Measure propeller shaft runout at several points by rotating final

drive companion flange with hands.

2. If runout still exceeds specifications, separate propeller shaft atfinal drive companion flange; then rotate companion flange 90,180, 270 degrees and install propeller shaft.

3. Check runout again. If runout still exceeds specifications,replace propeller shaft assembly.

4. Check the vibration by driving vehicle.


REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A-R

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3S80A-R : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667201


VIBRATIONIf vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout first.1. Measure propeller shaft runout at several points by rotating final

drive companion flange with hands.

2. If runout still exceeds specifications, separate propeller shaft atfinal drive companion flange; then rotate companion flange 120,240 degrees and install propeller shaft.



RUNOUT MEASURING POINT

LimitPropeller shaft runout : Refer to DLN-93, "Propel-

ler Shaft Runout".

SDIA1087E

: Vehicle front

Dimension A: 192 mm (7.56 in)B: 172 mm (6.77 in)C: 170 mm (6.69 in)

PDIA0770J

LimitPropeller shaft runout : Refer to DLN-101, "Pro-

peller Shaft Runout".

SDIA1087E


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >Propeller shaft runout measuring point (Point “ ”).
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3F80A-1VL107

REAR PROPELLER SHAFT: 3F80A-1VL107 : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667202


VIBRATIONIf vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout first.1. With a dial indicator, measure propeller shaft runout at runout

measuring points by rotating final drive companion flange withhands.

2. If runout still exceeds specifications, separate propeller shaft atfinal drive companion flange, then rotate companion flange 60,120, 180, 240, 300 degrees and install propeller shaft.




FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : Inspection INFOID:0000000004691639

OIL LEAKAGEMake sure that oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it.

OIL LEVEL

: Vehicle front

Dimension A: 192 mm (7.56 in)B: 172 mm (6.77 in)C: 172 mm (6.77 in)

JSDIA0169ZZ

LimitPropeller shaft runout : Refer to DLN-109, "Pro-

peller Shaft Runout".

SDIA1087E

: Vehicle front

Standard

A : 162 mm (6.38 in)B : 245 mm (9.65 in)C : 185 mm (7.28 in)

PDIA0772J


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

• Remove filler plug (1) and check oil level from filler plug mountinghole as shown in the figure.CAUTION:Never start engine while checking oil level.

• Set a gasket on filler plug (1) and install it on final drive assembly.Refer to DLN-122, "Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : Draining INFOID:0000000004691640

1. Stop engine.2. Remove drain plug (1) and drain gear oil.3. Set a gasket on drain plug (1) and install it to final drive assem-

bly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-122,"Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: F160A : Refilling INFOID:0000000004691641

1. Remove filler plug (1). Fill with new gear oil until oil level reachesthe specified level near filler plug mounting hole.

2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to filler plug (1),then install it to final drive assembly. Refer to DLN-122,"Exploded View".CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Inspection INFOID:0000000004691642

OIL LEAKAGEMake sure that oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it.

OIL LEVEL

JPDID0188ZZ

JPDID0189ZZ

Oil grade and Viscosity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Oil capacity : Refer to DLN-147, "Gen-eral Specifications".

JPDID0188ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >• Remove filler plug (1) and check oil level from filler plug mounting
hole as shown in the figure.CAUTION:Never start engine while checking oil level.

• Set a gasket on filler plug (1) and install it on final drive assembly.Refer to DLN-176, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), DLN-189,"AWD : Exploded View"(AWD).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Draining INFOID:0000000004691643

1. Stop the engine.2. Remove drain plug (1) and drain gear oil.3. Set a gasket on drain plug (1) and install it to final drive assem-

bly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-176, "2WD: Exploded View" (2WD), DLN-189, "AWD : Exploded View"(AWD).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200 : Refilling INFOID:0000000004691644


2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to filler plug (1),then install it to final drive assembly. Refer to DLN-176, "2WD :Exploded View" (2WD), DLN-189, "AWD : Exploded View"(AWD).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667209

OIL LEAKAGE• Make sure that oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it.

OIL LEVEL

JPDID0190ZZ

JPDID0191ZZ


Oil capacity : Refer to DLN-220, "Gen-eral Specification".

JPDID0190ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

• Remove filler plug (1) and check oil level from filler plug mountinghole as shown in the figure.CAUTION:Never start engine while checking oil level.

• Set a gasket on filler plug (1) and install it on final drive assembly.Refer to DLN-249, "M/T : Exploded View" (M/T models), DLN-261,"A/T : Exploded View" (A/T models).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : Draining INFOID:0000000004667210

1. Stop engine.2. Remove drain plug (1) and drain gear oil.3. Set a gasket on drain plug (1) and install it to final drive assem-

bly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to DLN-249, "M/T :Exploded View" (M/T models), DLN-261, "A/T : Exploded View"(A/T models).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL: R200V : Refilling INFOID:0000000004667211


2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to filler plug (1),then install it to final drive assembly. Refer to DLN-249, "M/T :Exploded View" (M/T models), DLN-261, "A/T : Exploded View"(A/T models).CAUTION:Never reuse gasket.

WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE)

WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE) : Adjustment INFOID:0000000004667212

BALANCING WHEELS (BONDING WEIGHT TYPE)

Preparation Before AdjustmentUsing releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.CAUTION:• Be careful not scratch the road wheel during removal.• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road

wheel.

Wheel Balance Adjustment• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,

select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for road wheels.1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.

PDIA0749J

PDIA0748J


Oil capacity : Refer to DLN-292, "Gen-eral Specification".

PDIA0749J


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer
unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weightwith a value closest to the calculated value above and install in to the designated outer position of, or atthe designated angle in relation to the road wheel.CAUTION:• Never install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the road wheel.

a. Indicated un balance value × 5/3 = balance weight to beinstalledCalculation example:23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) bal-ance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)NOTE:Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculatedbalance weight value.Example:36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz)

b. Installed balance weight in the position.• When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into

the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel asshown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) isaligned with the tire balance machine indication position(angle) (C).CAUTION:• Always use genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with

new ones.• Never install more than three sheets of balance weight.

c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), installtwo balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown inthe figure.CAUTION:Never install one balance weight sheet on top another.

3. Start tire balance machine again.4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the

tire balance machine indication position (angle).CAUTION:Never install more than two balance weight.

5. Start tire balance machine. Make sure that inner and outer resid-ual unbalance values are 5 g (0.17 oz) each or below.

6. If either residual unbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.17 oz), repeat installation procedures.

SMA054D

JPEIC0040ZZ

PEIA0033E


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

TIRE ROTATION (for 18 inch wheel models)• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.

Refer to MA-4, "Explanation of General Maintenance".• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified

torque.CAUTION:• Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing

the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheelsfrom developing any distortion.

• Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding thecriteria for preventing strain of disc rotor.

• Use NISSAN genuine wheel nuts for aluminum wheels.

• Perform the ID registration, after tire rotation. Refer to WT-6, "ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE : SpecialRepair Requirement".

TIRE ROTATION (for 19 inch wheel models)• Tire cannot be rotated in vehicle, as front tire are different size from rear tire is fixed in each tire.

CAUTION:• Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.• Use NISSAN genuine wheel nuts for aluminum wheels.

Safety Device Preventing from Being Incorrectly installed

FRONT BRAKE DISC ROTOR AND FRONT WHEEL• Front and rear wheel size for this model differs, therefore special pin (1) is adopted to the front brake disc

rotor (2). And a hole (3) that matches to this pin is adopted to the front wheel (4) (the rear wheel does nothave this wheel). This structure prevents the rear wheel from being mistakenly installed on the front.

T-TYPE SPARE TIRE WHEEL

Wheel balance Dynamic (At flange) Static (At flange)

Maximum allowable un-balance

Refer to MA-36, "ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel".

Wheel nuts tighting torque : Refer to WT-102, "Wheel Nut".

SMA829C

Wheel nuts tighting torque : Refer to MA-36, "ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel".

JPEIC0015ZZ


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >• Regarding spare tire (for emergency) wheel, wrong assembly pro-
tection pin through hole (1) has been set in addition to regular boltholes (2) in order to enable installation to front wheel.NOTE:Protection pin through hole of 18 inch spare wheel is non-throughtype.

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246070

• If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.

BRAKE LINES AND CABLES

BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246071

• Check brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improperattachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, etc.

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID : Changing INFOID:0000000004246072

1. Drain brake fluid from each bleed valve.2. Refill until new brake fluid comes out from each bleed valve.

Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refillbrake fluid.Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".• Refill with recommended Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116).Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

• Never reuse drained brake fluid.• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.

DISC BRAKE

JPEIC0029ZZ

SBR451D

SBR389C

SBR419C


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

DISC BRAKE : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246073

DISC ROTORCheck condition, wear, and damage.

CALIPER• Check for leakage.

BRAKE PAD• Check for wear or damage.

DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000004667213

1 PISTON TYPEUnit: mm (in)



SMA922A

BRA0010D

Item Limit

Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.079)

Disc rotor

Wear thickness 30.0 (1.181)

Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.015 (0.0006)

Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.035 (0.0014)

Item Limit


Disc rotor




Item Limit



CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake INFOID:0000000004667214

1 PISTON (FRONT 1 PISTON) TYPEUnit: mm (in)

1 PISTON (FRONT 2 PISTON) TYPEUnit: mm (in)


STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246076

STEERING GEAR• Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease

leakage.• Check connection with steering column for looseness.

STEERING LINKAGECheck ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES

Disc rotor




Item Limit

Item Limit


Disc rotor




Item Limit


Disc rotor




Item Limit


Disc rotor




SLIA0014E


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246077

Check fluid level in reservoir tank with engine off. Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F)or “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).CAUTION:• Do not overfill.• Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

• Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,loose connections, chafing and deterioration.

• Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.

AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS

AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection INFOID:0000000004246078

Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,cracks, wear or other damage.• Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.• Check wheel bearings for smooth operation.• Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.• Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage.• Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust

cover for cracks or other damage.

DRIVE SHAFT

SST850C

SST851C

SMA525A

SFA392B


CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection INFOID:0000000004667596

Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and greaseleakage.

SFA108A


BODY MAINTENANCE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

BODY MAINTENANCELOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricating INFOID:0000000004246079

For hood lock illustration. Refer to DLK-206, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Exploded View" and DLK-209, "HOODLOCK CONTROL : Exploded View".For door lock illustration. Refer to DLK-228, "DOOR LOCK : Exploded View".For trunk lid lock illustration. Refer to DLK-235, "TRUNK LID LOCK : Exploded View".SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS

SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : InspectionINFOID:0000000004246080

For front seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-6, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View".For rear seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Exploded View".CAUTION:• After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hard-

wares (I.e. anchor bolt, guide rail set). Nissan recommends to replace all seat belt assemblies in useduring a collision, unless not damaged and properly operating after minor collision.Also inspect seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision, and replace if damaged or improperlyoperating.Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal colli-sion where the driver and passenger air bags are deployed.

• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair.Replace as seat belt assembly.

• If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace belt assembly.• Never oil tongue and buckle.• Use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.For details, refer to SB-4, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection", SB-9, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspec-tion" in SB section.• Check anchors for loose mounting• Check belts for damage• Check retractor for smooth operation• Check function of buckles and tongues when buckled and released


SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)DRIVE BELT

DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt INFOID:0000000004667186

DRIVE BELT

ENGINE COOLANT

ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000004667188

ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)Unit: (US qt, Imp qt)

ENGINE OIL

ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification INFOID:0000000004667189

ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)Unit: (US qt, lmp qt)

SPARK PLUG

SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug INFOID:0000000004667187

SPARK PLUGUnit: mm (in)

ROAD WHEEL

ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel INFOID:0000000004667190

ALUMINUM WHEEL (CONVENTIONAL)

STEEL WHEEL (FOR EMERGENCY USE)

Tension of drive belt Belt tension is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by drive belt auto-tensioner.

Engine coolant capacity [With reservoir tank (“MAX” level)]A/T models 8.5 (9, 7-1/2)

M/T models 8.6 (9-1/8, 7-5/8)

Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) 0.8 (7/8, 3/4)

Drain and refill With oil filter change 4.9 (5-1/8, 4-1/4)

Without oil filter change 4.6 (4-7/8, 4)

Dry engine (Overhaul) 5.7 (6, 5)

Make DENSO

Standard type FXE24HR11

Gap (Nominal) 1.1 (0.043)

Item Limit

Radial runoutLateral deflection

Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)Vertical deflection

Allowable unbalanceDynamic (At flange) Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)

Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)



C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

N

O

A


M

Item Limit

Radial runoutLateral deflection

Less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in)Vertical deflection

Allowable unbalanceDynamic (At flange) Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)

Static (At flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)


DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

C

D

E

BSECTION MWI

A

METER, WARNING LAMP & INDICATOR

WI

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

O

P

CONTENTS

M

BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 4

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .......... 4Work flow ..................................................................4


METER SYSTEM ................................................. 6

METER SYSTEM .........................................................6METER SYSTEM : System Diagram ........................6METER SYSTEM : System Description ....................6METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ......10METER SYSTEM : Component Description ...........10

SPEEDOMETER ........................................................11SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram .......................11SPEEDOMETER : System Description ...................11SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location .......12SPEEDOMETER : Component Description ............12

TACHOMETER ..........................................................13TACHOMETER : System Diagram .........................13TACHOMETER : System Description .....................13TACHOMETER : Component Parts Location .........14TACHOMETER : Component Description ..............14

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........15ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram ......................................................15ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description .................................................15ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location ......................................16ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description ...........................................16

FUEL GAUGE ............................................................17FUEL GAUGE : System Diagram ...........................17FUEL GAUGE : System Description .......................17FUEL GAUGE : Component Parts Location ...........18FUEL GAUGE : Component Description ................18

ODO/TRIP METER .....................................................19ODO/TRIP METER : System Diagram ....................19ODO/TRIP METER : System Description ................19ODO/TRIP METER : Component Parts Location ....20ODO/TRIP METER : Component Description .........20

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR ..................................21SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram ....21SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Descrip-tion ...........................................................................21SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location ..........................................................22SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component De-scription ...................................................................22

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS ..................23WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Diagram ...................................................................23WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Description ...............................................................23WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Com-ponent Parts Location ..............................................24WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Com-ponent Description ...................................................24

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL .........................25METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Di-agram ......................................................................25METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System De-scription ...................................................................25METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : Component Parts Location ..........................................................26METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : Component Description ...............................................................26

INFORMATION DISPLAY ..........................................27INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Diagram ..........27INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description .....27INFORMATION DISPLAY : Component Parts Lo-cation .......................................................................30INFORMATION DISPLAY : Component Descrip-tion ...........................................................................30

MWI-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

COMPASS ......................................................... 32Description .............................................................. 32Component Parts Location ..................................... 33Special Repair Requirement ................................... 33

CLOCK ............................................................... 34Component Parts Location ..................................... 34

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (METER) ....................... 35Diagnosis Description ............................................. 35

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.) .......................................................... 37

CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A) ................... 37

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 41

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 41Description .............................................................. 41DTC Logic ............................................................... 41Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 41

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 42Description .............................................................. 42DTC Logic ............................................................... 42Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 42

B2201 COMMUNICATION ERROR 1 ............... 43Description .............................................................. 43DTC Logic ............................................................... 43Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43

B2202 COMMUNICATION ERROR 2 ............... 45Description .............................................................. 45DTC Logic ............................................................... 45Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 45

B2205 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 47Description .............................................................. 47DTC Logic ............................................................... 47Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 47

B2267 ENGINE SPEED ..................................... 48Description .............................................................. 48DTC Logic ............................................................... 48Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48

B2268 WATER TEMP ........................................ 49Description .............................................................. 49DTC Logic ............................................................... 49Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 50

COMBINATION METER ........................................... 50COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure .... 50

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. ............................. 50UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. : Diagnosis Pro-cedure ..................................................................... 50

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBU-TION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) .............................. 51

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBU-TION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) : Diagnosis Pro-cedure ..................................................................... 51

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....... 53Description .............................................................. 53Component Function Check ................................... 53Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53Component Inspection ............................................ 54

METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 56

Description .............................................................. 56Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56Component Inspection ............................................ 57

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 58Description .............................................................. 58Component Function Check ................................... 58Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58Component Inspection ............................................ 58

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIR-CUIT ................................................................... 60

Description .............................................................. 60Component Function Check ................................... 60Diagnosis Procedure (A/T models) ......................... 60Diagnosis Procedure (M/T models) ........................ 61Component Inspection ............................................ 61

WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 63Description .............................................................. 63Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63Component Inspection ............................................ 63

COMPASS ......................................................... 64Wiring Diagram - COMPASS - ................................ 64

CLOCK .............................................................. 66Wiring Diagram - CLOCK - ..................................... 66

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 68

COMBINATION METER .................................... 68Reference Value ..................................................... 68Wiring Diagram - METER - ..................................... 71Fail-safe .................................................................. 80DTC Index ............................................................... 81

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. ..................... 82Reference Value ..................................................... 82Wiring Diagram - METER - ..................................... 89Fail-safe .................................................................. 98DTC Index ............................................................... 99

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRI-BUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ................101

Reference Value ................................................... 101Wiring Diagram - IPDM E/R - ................................ 108


WI

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

Fail-safe ................................................................ 111DTC Index ............................................................ 113

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 114

THE FUEL GAUGE POINTER DOES NOT MOVE ............................................................... 114

Description ............................................................ 114Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114

THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPER-ATIVE ............................................................... 115


THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON ...................................... 116


THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF .................................... 117


THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY .......................................................... 118


THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CON-TINUES DISPLAYING, or DOES NOT DIS-PLAY ................................................................ 119


THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ........ 120


THE TRUNK OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ........ 121

Description .............................................................121Diagnosis Procedure .............................................121

THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT ................................................... 122

Description .............................................................122Diagnosis Procedure .............................................122

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 123

COMPASS ...............................................................123COMPASS : Description ........................................123

INFORMATION DISPLAY ........................................123INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description ................123

PRECAUTION ............................................ 124

PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 124Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-SIONER" ...............................................................124

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 125

COMBINATION METER ................................. 125Exploded View .......................................................125Removal and Installation .......................................125Disassembly and Assembly ...................................126

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. ................... 127Exploded View .......................................................127Removal and Installation .......................................127

METER CONTROL SWITCH .......................... 128Exploded View .......................................................128Removal and Installation .......................................128

COMPASS ....................................................... 129Exploded View .......................................................129Removal and Installation .......................................129

CLOCK ............................................................ 130Exploded View .......................................................130Removal and Installation .......................................130



Work flow INFOID:0000000004246336

OVERALL SEQUENCE

• Reference 1···MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description".• Reference 2···MWI-99, "DTC Index".• Reference 3···MWI-50, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure".

DETAILED FLOW

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment underwhich the malfunction occurred.

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SYMPTOM

JSNIA0542GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< BASIC INSPECTION >• Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer.• Check that any other malfunctions are present.

>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS OPERATION

Check that the on board diagnosis function operates. Refer to MWI-35, "Diagnosis Description". Does the on board diagnosis function operate normally?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> GO TO 6.

4.CHECK CONSULT-III SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

Connect CONSULT-III and perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. Refer to MWI-37, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".Are self-diagnosis results normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> GO TO 8.

5.NARROW DOWN THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 8.

6.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS

Check combination meter power supply and ground circuits. Refer to MWI-50, "COMBINATION METER :Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 7.NO >> GO TO 8.

7.REPLACE COMBINATION METER

Replace combination meter.

>> GO TO 9.

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.NOTE:If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

Check that the combination meter operates normally.Do they operate normally?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 1.


METER SYSTEM
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONMETER SYSTEMMETER SYSTEM

METER SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512963

METER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000004512964

COMBINATION METER• The combination meter retrieves the information required for controlling the operations of the meters, indica-

tor lamps/warning lamps and information display from the communication signals from the unified meter andA/C amp. and the signals from various switches and sensors.

• The combination meter incorporates a trip computer that displays warnings and messages on the informa-tion display according to the information received from various units.

• The combination meter incorporates a buzzer function that sounds an audible alarm with the integratedbuzzer device. Refer to WCS-5, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description" for further details.

• The combination meter integrates the meter circuit check function and the segment check function thatchecks the information display operation.

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.• Receives information required by the combination meter from various units via CAN communication line and

transmits it to the combination meter with communication line.• The unified meter and A/C amp. incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power con-

sumption according to the vehicle status. Refer to BCS-11, "System Description" for details.• The unified meter and A/C amp. incorporates a diagnosis function that allows the technician to perform diag-

noses with CONSULT-III.

JSNIA2245GB


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >Between unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter.

IPDM E/R• IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to

the unified meter and A/C amp. via BCM with the CAN communication line.• IPDM E/R is equipped with the diagnosis function. It can perform the operation check of oil pressure warning

lamp with the auto active test and the diagnosis with CONSULT-III.

METER CONTROL FUNCTION LISTX: Applicable

Unit Communication line Input from combination meter Output to combination meter

Unified meter and A/C amp.

Communication line(METER <-> AMP.)

• Parking brake switch signal • Washer level switch signal• Meter day/night condition signal• Illumination control switch signal• Refuel status signal• Low fuel warning lamp signal• Odo data signal

• Vehicle speed signal• Turn indicator signal• High beam request signal• Engine speed signal• Fuel level sensor signal• Engine coolant temperature signal• A/T CHECK indicator signal• Oil pressure switch signal• Door switch signal• Buzzer output signal • AFS OFF indicator lamp signal• Tire pressure signal • VDC OFF indicator signal• ABS warning lamp signal• Brake warning lamp signal• Malfunction indicator lamp signal• 4WAS warning lamp signal• Master warning signal• AWD warning lamp signal

Communication line(LCD <-> AMP.)

• Average fuel consumption reset signal• Travel time reset signal• Possible driving distance reset signal• Average vehicle speed reset signal• Select switch signal• Enter switch signal• Trip A/B reset switch signal• Ambient air temperature display signal

• Shift position signal• Meter display signal• Door switch signal• Trunk switch signal• Fuel level sensor signal• Parking brake switch signal• Washer level switch signal• Charge warning signal• Instantaneous fuel consumption display

signal• Ambient air temperature display signal• Average fuel consumption display signal• Average vehicle speed display signal• Possible driving distance display signal• Engine speed signal• Vehicle speed signal

System Description Signal sourceVia unified

meter and A/C amp.

Meter/gauge

SpeedometerReceives vehicle speed signal and indicates vehi-cle speed.

ABS actuator and elec-tric unit (control unit)

X

TachometerReceives engine speed signal and indicates en-gine speed.

ECM X

Fuel gaugeReceives fuel level sensor signal and indicates fuel level.

Fuel level sensor unit X


Receives engine coolant temperature signal and indicates coolant temperature.

ECM X



Receives oil pressure warning lamp signal and il-luminates warning lamp.

IPDM E/R X

Master warningIlluminates according to warning output on infor-mation display.

— X


METER SYSTEM
Information display

Door open warningReceives door switch signals and displays warn-ing.

BCM X

Trunk open warningReceives trunk lid opener switch signal and dis-plays warning.

BCM X

Parking brake re-lease warning

Receives parking brake switch signal and vehicle speed signal and displays warnings.

Parking brake switch


X

Low fuel warningReceives fuel gauge signal and displays warning

if fuel level decreases to 12 (3-1/8 US gal, 2-5/8 Imp gal) or less.


Low washer fluid warning

Receives washer level switch signal and displays warning.

Washer level switch

Low outside tempera-ture warning

Monitors ambient sensor signal and displays warning if ambient temperature decreases to 3°C (37°F) or less. (If enabled)

Ambient sensor X

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Calculates instantaneous fuel consumption based on received vehicle speed signals and fuel con-sumption monitor signal and displays it.

ECM X


X

Average fuel con-sumption

Calculates average fuel consumption in a reset-to-reset interval based on received vehicle speed signals and fuel consumption monitor signal and displays it.

ECM X


X

Average vehicle speed

Calculates average vehicle speed in a reset-to-re-set interval based on received vehicle speed sig-nals and displays it.


X

Travel timeDisplays accumulated key switch ON time from reset to reset.

— X

Travel distanceCalculates accumulated travel distance in a reset-to-reset interval based on received vehicle speed signals and displays it.


X

Possible driving dis-tance

The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates the possible driving distance according to the vehicle speed signal and the fuel level sensor unit re-ceived with CAN communication line, and trans-mits it to the combination meter by means of communication line.


X


Ambient air tempera-ture

Corrects ambient air temperature value based on received ambient sensor signals and displays it.

Ambient sensor X

System Description Signal sourceVia unified

meter and A/C amp.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


ARRANGEMENT OF COMBINATION METER

JSNIA0533GB

A. U.S.A. B. Canada


METER SYSTEM
METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512965

METER SYSTEM : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512966

JPNIA0501ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. BCM 3. IPDM E/R

4. Oil pressure switch 5. Ambient sensor 6. Combination meter

7.Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (main)

8. Fuel level sensor unit (sub)

A. Behind cluster lid C B. Oil pan (upper) RH side C. Condenser (front)

D. Rear seat (lower right) E. Rear seat (lower left)

Unit Description

Combination meter

Controls the following with the signals from the unified meter and A/C amp, switches and sensors.

• Speedometer • Tachometer

• Water temperature gauge • Fuel gauge

• Warning lamps • Indicator lamps

• Information display • Warning chime


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


SPEEDOMETER

SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512967

SPEEDOMETER : System Description INFOID:0000000004512968

• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) converts the pulse signal provided by the wheel sensor to avehicle speed signal and transmits it to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the vehicle speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit(control unit) with CAN communication line and transmits it to the combination meter by means of communi-cation line.

• The combination meter indicates the vehicle speed according to the vehicle speed signal received from theunified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.


• The combination meter receives the necessary information from various units via CAN communi-cation line and transmits them to the unified meter and A/C amp. with the communication line that connects both of them.

• Transmits the fuel gauge signal from the fuel gauge unit with the communication line that connects the unified meter and A/C amp. and the combination meter.

• Reads the signals from the A/T shift selector and paddle shifter and transmits them to TCM with CAN communication line.

IPDM E/RIPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via BCM with CAN communication line.

Fuel level sensor unit Refer to MWI-53, "Description".

Oil pressure switch Refer to MWI-58, "Description".

ECM

Transmits the following signals to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

• Engine speed signal • Engine coolant temperature signal

• Fuel consumption monitor signal


Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

BCM• Transmits signals provided by various units to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN commu-

nication line.• Transmits the security signal to the combination meter.

A/T shift selector

Transmits the following signals to the unified meter and A/C amp.

• Manual mode signal • Not manual mode signal

• Manual mode shift up signal • Manual mode shift down signal

Paddle shifterTransmits the paddle shifter up signal and paddle shifter down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.

TCM Transmits shift position signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.

Meter control switch Refer to MWI-56, "Description".

Washer level switch Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter.

Brake fluid level switch Transmits the brake fluid level switch signal to the combination meter.

Parking brake switch Refer to MWI-60, "Description".

Unit Description

JSNIA0611GB


METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512969

SPEEDOMETER : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512970

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterIndicates the vehicle speed according to the vehicle speed signal received from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line to the combination meter by means of communication line.




WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


TACHOMETER

TACHOMETER : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512971

TACHOMETER : System Description INFOID:0000000004512972

• ECM converts the pulse signal provided by the crankshaft position sensor to an engine speed signal andtransmits it to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits engine speed signal to combination meter with communication line.• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the engine speed signal from ECM with CAN communication line

and transmits it to the combination meter by means of communication line.• Combination meter converses engine speed signal to the angle signal, and commands to tachometer.

JSNIA0160GB


METER SYSTEM
TACHOMETER : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512973

TACHOMETER : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512974

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterIndicates the engine speed according to the engine speed signal received from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the engine speed signal received from ECM with CAN communication line to the com-bination meter by means of communication line.

ECMTransmits the engine speed signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512975

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description INFOID:0000000004512976

• ECM converses a signal from engine coolant temperature sensor to engine coolant temperature signal, andtransmits to unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter with commu-nication line.

• Combination meter converses engine coolant temperature signal to the angle signal, and commands toengine coolant temperature gauge.

JSNIA0162GB


METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts LocationINFOID:0000000004512977

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512978

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterIndicates the water temperature gauge according to the engine coolant temperature signal re-ceived from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


FUEL GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512979

FUEL GAUGE : System Description INFOID:0000000004512980

CONTROL OUTLINE• The unified meter and A/C amp. reads the fuel level sensor signal from the fuel gauge unit and transmits it to

the combination meter with the communication line.• The combination meter indicates the fuel level on the fuel gauge according to the received fuel level sensor

signal.

REFUEL CONTROLThe unit judges that the driver is refueling the vehicle and accelerates the fuel gauge needle movement if thefuel level changes by 15 (4 US gal, 3-3/10 Imp gal) or more.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the engine coolant temperature signal received from ECM with CAN communication line to the combination meter by means of communication line.

ECMTransmits the engine coolant temperature signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

Unit Description

JSNIA0612GB


METER SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512981

FUEL GAUGE : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512982

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterIndicates the fuel gauge according to the fuel level sensor signal received from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the fuel level sensor signal from the fuel level sensor unit to the combination meter by means of communication line.



WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


ODO/TRIP METER

ODO/TRIP METER : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512983

ODO/TRIP METER : System Description INFOID:0000000004512984

• The unified meter and A/C amp. transmits the vehicle speed signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (con-trol unit) to the combination meter.

• The combination meter calculates the vehicle distance according to the vehicle speed signal. The vehicledistance is displayed.

JSNIA0613GB


METER SYSTEM
ODO/TRIP METER : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512985

ODO/TRIP METER : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512986

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterThe combination meter calculates the vehicle distance according to the vehicle speed signal. The vehicle distance is displayed.

Unified meter and A/C amp.The unified meter and A/C amp. transmits the vehicle speed signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) to the combination meter.




WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512987

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description INFOID:0000000004512988

Shift position is displayed in the information display LCD in the combination meter.

MANUAL MODE

When Operated with A/T Shift Selector• Unified meter and A/C amp. inputs manual mode signal and manual mode shift-up/down signal from A/T

shift selector (manual mode switch), and transmits the signals to TCM with CAN communication line.• TCM processes manual mode signal and manual mode shift-up/down signal, and transmits manual mode

indicator signal and shift position signal to unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits manual mode indicator signal and shift position signal to combination

meter with the communication line.• Combination meter indicates A/T gear position and manual mode indicator, when receiving manual mode

indicator signal and shift position signal.

When Operated with Paddle Shifter• Unified meter and A/C amp. inputs manual mode signal from A/T shift selector (manual mode switch) or the

paddle shifter-up/down signal from the paddle shifter, and transmits the signals to TCM with CAN communi-cation line.

• TCM processes manual mode signal and paddle shifter-up/down signal, and transmits manual mode indica-tor signal and shift position signal to unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.

• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits manual mode indicator signal and shift position signal to combinationmeter with the communication line.

• Combination meter indicates A/T gear position and manual mode indicator, when receiving manual modeindicator signal and shift position signal.

NOT MANUAL MODE• Unified meter and A/C amp. inputs not manual mode signal from A/T shift selector (manual mode switch),

and transmits the signals to TCM with CAN communication line.• TCM transmits shift position signal to unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communication line.• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits shift position signal to combination meter with the communication line.• Combination meter indicates shift position when receiving shift position signal.

JSNIA2246GB


METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512989

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512990

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterDisplays the shift position on the information display with shift position signal and manual mode in-dicator signal received from unified meter and A/C amp.


• Transmits the signals from the A/T shift selector and paddle shifter to TCM with CAN communi-cation line.

• Transmits shift position signal and manual mode indicator signal received from TMC with CAN communication line to the combination meter by means of communication line.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512991

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : System Description INFOID:0000000004512992

OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP• IPDM E/R inputs oil pressure switch signal from oil pressure switch, and transmits the signal to unified meter

and A/C amp. through BCM with CAN communication line.• Unified meter and A/C amp. transmits oil pressure switch signal to combination meter with communication

line.• Let the combination meter turn oil pressure warning lamp ON with received oil pressure switch signal.

A/T shift selector

Transmits the following signals to the unified meter and A/C amp.

• Manual mode signal • Not manual mode signal

• Manual mode shift up signal • Manual mode shift down signal

Paddle shifterTransmits the paddle shifter up signal and paddle shifter down signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.

TCM Transmits shift position signal and manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.

Unit Description

JSNIA0163GB


METER SYSTEM
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512993

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512994

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterTurns the oil pressure warning lamp ON/OFF according to the oil pressure switch signal received from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the oil pressure switch signal received from the IPDM E/R with BCM to the combination meter by means of communication line.

IPDM E/RIPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via BCM with the CAN communication line.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512995

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000004512996

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONThe combination meter controls the meter illumination by the illumination control switch signal from the metercontrol switch and the position light request signal transmitted by BCM with unified meter and A/C amp.

Daytime ModeMeter illumination is adjusted to 5 steps by illumination control switch(1) in daytime mode.

Nighttime Mode• Combination meter is transferred to nighttime mode with position light request signal from BCM with CAN

communication line.• Meter illumination is adjusted to 22 steps by illumination control switch in nighttime.

Oil pressure switch Refer to MWI-58, "Description".

BCMTransmits the oil pressure switch signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication line.

Unit Description

JSNIA0615GB

JSNIA0026GB


METER SYSTEM
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004512997

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : Component Description INFOID:0000000004512998

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterControls the meter illumination with the illumination control switch signal from the meter control switch and the position light request signal from unified meter and A/C amp.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN communication to the com-bination meter by means of communication.


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Diagram INFOID:0000000004512999

INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description INFOID:0000000004513000

DESCRIPTION• The combination meter retrieves the information required for controlling the operations of the information

display from the communication signals from the unified meter and A/C amp., etc.• The combination meter incorporates a trip computer that displays the warning / information according to the

information received from various units.

PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNINGThe combination meter indicates parking brake release warning judged with the vehicle speed signal receivedfrom the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line and the parking brake switch signal fromthe parking brake switch.

Warning Operation ConditionParking brake release warning is judged if all of the following conditions are fulfilled• Vehicle speed is 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or higher• Parking brake switch ON

LOW FUEL WARNINGThe combination meter indicates low fuel warning judged with the fuel level sensor signal received from theunified meter and A/C amp.

Warning Operation Condition• Fuel level: Approx. 12.7 (3-3/8 US gal, 2-6/8 Imp gal) or less

LOW WASHER FLUID WARNINGThe combination meter indicates low washer fluid warning judged with the signal from the washer level switch.

Warning Operation Condition

Meter control switchTransmits the following signals to the combination meter.

• Illumination control switch signal (+) • Illumination control switch signal (–)

Unit Description

JSNIA0032GB


METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >• Indicates the warning when it is in washer level switch ON condition for 180 seconds or more. Release the
warning when it is in washer level switch OFF condition for 30 seconds or more.

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN WARNING• The combination meter indicates door open warning judged with each door switch signal received from the

unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.• The combination meter indicates trunk open warning judged with the trunk switch signal received from the

unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication line.

INSTANTANEOUS FUEL CONSUMPTION• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the fuel consumption monitor signal from ECM and the vehicle

speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.• The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates the instantaneous fuel consumption according to the fuel con-

sumption monitor signal and the vehicle speed signal received with CAN communication line, and transmitsit to the combination meter.

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the fuel consumption monitor signal from ECM and the vehicle

speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.• The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates the average fuel consumption according to the fuel consumption

monitor signal and the vehicle speed signal received with CAN communication line, and transmits it to thecombination meter.

• The average fuel consumption displayed on the information display is uploaded at approximately 30-secondintervals.

NOTE:“−−−−” is displayed for approximately 30 seconds just after the reset operation and after the ignition switch isOFF → ON. It is displayed simultaneously until the vehicle drives approximately 500 m (0.31 mile).

AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the vehicle speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) via CAN communication line.• Measures the time during the ignition switch ON with the unified meter and A/C amp.• The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates the average vehicle speed according to the above signals. These

signals are transmitted to the combination meter with the communication line.• The average vehicle speed displayed on the information display is uploaded at approximately 30-second

intervals.NOTE:“−−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds just after the reset operation and after the ignition switch is OFF → ON. It isdisplayed simultaneously until the vehicle drives approximately 500 m (0.31 mile).

TRAVEL TIMEMeasures the time during the ignition switch ON with the unified meter and A/C amp, and transmits it to thecombination meter by means of communication line.

TRAVEL DISTANCE• The unified meter and A/C amp. transmits the vehicle speed signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (con-

trol unit) to the combination meter.• The combination meter calculates the vehicle distance according to the vehicle speed signal. The vehicle

distance is displayed.

POSSIBLE DRIVING DISTANCE

JSNIA0033GB


WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates possible driving distance according to the vehicle speed signaltransmitted through CAN communication and the fuel level sensor signal transmitted from the fuel level sen-sor. These signals are transmitted to the combination meter with the communication line.NOTE:• “−−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is OFF → ON. It is displayed simultaneously until

the vehicle drives approximately 500 m (0.31 mile).• The indicated values may not match each other when filling the fuel with the ignition switch ON. Refer to

MWI-123, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description".

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE• The unified meter and A/C amp. receives the ambient sensor signal from the ambient sensor.• The unified meter and A/C amp. calculates the ambient temperature according to the ambient sensor signal,

and transmits it to the combination meter.• The indicated temperature is corrected by the ignition switch signal, the ambient sensor detection tempera-

ture, and the vehicle speed signal. It does not increase if the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (12 MPH).

Correction Process (Ignition Switch OFF → ON)The ambient temperature sensor detection temperature is not displayed in real time if all of the following con-ditions are fulfilled. The indicated temperature before the ignition switch OFF is displayed.• The ignition switch OFF time is less than 3.5 hours.• The ambient temperature sensor detection temperature is higher than the indicated temperature before the

ignition switch OFF.

Correction Process (Ignition Switch ON)Perform the following correction if the ambient sensor detection temperature is higher than the indicated tem-perature when the vehicle speed is 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more.• Shorten the update time of the indicated temperature according to the increase of the vehicle speed.• Increase the indicated temperature by 1°C (34°F) per 1 minute until it reaches to the ambient air tempera-

ture detection value when the ambient sensor detection temperature is higher than the indicated tempera-ture at 8°C (46°F) or more.

NOTE:The ambient sensor input value that is displayed on “Data Monitor” of CONSULT-III is the value before the cor-rection. It may not match the indicated temperature on the information display.

SETTING

Setting item list

* : Press and hold the switch (1 second or more).

Items Setting range Setting unit Description

ALERT

TIME TO REST No setting - 6 hours30 minutes,

[60 minutes]*

Time to rest is displayed on the informa-tion display if the vehicle reached the set travel distance.

ICY ON/OFF —Low outside temperature is displayed on the information display if the ambient tem-perature is 3°C (37°F) or less.

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OILNo setting - 18,500 miles, (No setting - 30,000 km)

250 miles (500 km), [500 miles (1000 km)]*

The engine oil replacement interval is dis-played on the information display if the ve-hicle reached the set distance.

OIL FILTERNo setting - 18,500 miles, (No setting - 30,000 km)

250 miles (500 km), [500 miles (1000 km)]*

The oil filter replacement interval is dis-played on the information display if the ve-hicle reached the set distance.

TIRENo setting - 18,500 miles, (No setting - 30,000 km)

250 miles (500 km), [500 miles (1000 km)]*

The tire replacement interval is displayed on the information display if the vehicle reached the set distance.

OTHERNo setting - 18,500 miles, (No setting - 30,000 km)

250 miles (500 km), [500 miles (1000 km)]*

The other replacement interval is dis-played on the information display if the ve-hicle reached the set distance.

DISPLAY

LANGUAGE ENGLISH/FRANCAIS —Changing the language setting can be performed.

UNIT US/METRIC —Changing the unit setting can be per-formed.


METER SYSTEM
INFORMATION DISPLAY : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004513001

INFORMATION DISPLAY : Component Description INFOID:0000000004513002

JPNIA0501ZZ







Unit Description

Combination meterControls the information display with the signals received from the unified meter and A/C amp. by means of communication and the signals from various switches and sensors.

Unified meter and A/C amp.Transmits signals received from various units to the combination meter by means of communica-tion.



WI

METER SYSTEM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


ECMTransmits the following signals to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.

• Engine speed signal • Fuel consumption monitor signal


Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.

BCMTransmits signals provided by various units to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN commu-nication.

Meter control switchTransmits the following signals to the combination meter.

• Enter switch signal • Select switch signal

Washer level switch Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter.

Parking brake switch Refer to MWI-60, "Description".

Door switch Transmits the door switch signals to BCM.

Trunk room lamp switch Transmits the room lamp switch signal to BCM.

Ambient sensorDetects the ambient air temperature and transmits the ambient sensor signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.

Unit Description


COMPASS
COMPASS


DESCRIPTION• This electronic compass is able to display 8 primary directions: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW.• The compass switch (1) is used to operate the compass.

Switch Operation

• All standard compasses determine direction relative to Magnetic North; however, this electronic compass isdesigned to display direction relative to True North.

• The difference between Magnetic North and True North varies from place to place across the surface of theearth.

• This electronic compass must be “told” approximately where it is on the earth’s surface so that the MagneticNorth reading can be properly converted into a True North display.

• To tell the electronic compass where it’s at, the earth is separated into numbered “Zone Variances”. TheZone Variance number in which the compass is to function must be entered into this electronic compass.

• Each zone is magnetically about 4.2° wide. Typically, anything under 22.5° total zone change is not noticedon the electronic compass display. However, over 22.5°, a reading may be off by one or more primary direc-tions.

• On long trips, a vehicle may leave its original zone and enter one or more new zones. Generally, you do notneed to reset the compass zone if you travel between 3 or 4 zones, such as business travel or vacation. Thetypical driver will not notice any difference on the display within 3 or 4 zones. However, if the vehicle is “per-manently” moved to a new location, it is recommended that the compass zone be reset.

ZONE VARIATION SETTING PROCEDURE1. Press and hold the compass switch for 3 – 9 seconds.2. The current zone setting appears on the compass display.3. Find the current geographical location number in the Zone Varia-

tion Chart.4. Select the new zone number. (Press the compass switch until

the new zone number appears on the compass display.)5. After select the new zone number, the compass display will

automatically shows a direction within a few seconds.6. Perform the following Calibration Procedure for more accurate

indications.

Press Compass is turned ON/OFF

Press and hold(for 3 - 9 sec.)

Compass display (2) turns to zone variation change mode

Press and hold (for more than 9 sec.)

Compass display turns to calibration mode

SKIB8868E

SEL168Y


WI

COMPASS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


CALIBRATION PROCEDURENOTE:The compass calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances may causethe compass to operate inaccurately. Example: Driving from rural (wide open) areas to crowded city areas, orif an aftermarket (i.e., non original equipment) antenna with a magnetic base is attached to the vehicle. Cali-brate the mirror compass if the display shows only one direction or a limited number of directions.NOTE:• If “magnetic hats” are used in the dealership for vehicle identification, remove the hat from the vehicle before

performing the following steps. Do not put the hat back on the vehicle after the procedure is completed.• Drive the vehicle to an open level area; away from large metallic objects, structures, and overhead power

lines.• Turn off “non-essential” electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater/air conditioning, wipers) and

close the doors.1. Verify the correct compass zone setting for the geographical location.2. Press and hold the compass switch for more than 9 seconds.3. “C” is displayed on the compass display, when calibration starts.4. Drive slowly [less than 8 km/h (5 MPH)] in a circle until the “C / CAL” is replaced with primary headings (N,

NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW).NOTE:This will require driving at least 2 complete 360 degree circles; 3 complete circles may be required.

5. The compass calibration procedure is now complete. The compass should operate normally.NOTE:If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked,repeat the calibration procedure.


Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004246379

1.PERFORM ZONE VARIATION SETTING

Perform the zone variation setting. Refer to MWI-32, "Description".

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM CALIBRATION

Perform the calibration. Refer to MWI-32, "Description".

>> Setting completion

1 : Compass switch

2 : Compass display

SKIB8868E


CLOCK
CLOCK


1 : Clock

JSNIA0038GB


WI

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (METER)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004246381

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE• Information display LCD segment operation can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.• Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.

OPERATION PROCEDURE1. Turn ignition switch ON, and switch the trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”.

NOTE:If the diagnosis function is activated with “trip A” displayed, the mileage on “trip A” is reset to “0000.0”.(The same way for “trip B”.)

2. Turn ignition switch OFF.3. While pressing the trip A/B reset switch (1), turn ignition switch

ON again.4. Make sure that the trip meter displays “0000.0”.5. Press the trip A/B reset switch at least 3 times. (Within 7 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned ON.)

6. The unified meter control unit is turned to self-diagnosis mode.• Displays "888888" (1) and "8888.8" (2) in the information display LCD (3) for approximately 5 seconds

and then blinks the segment dots of the information display LCD alternately.

• Water temperature gauge and fuel gauge return to zero, and at the same time.

NOTE:• Check trip A/B reset switch and combination meter power supply and ground circuit when self-diagnosis

mode of combination meter does not start. Replace combination meter if they are normal.• If any of the segments is not displayed, replace combination meter.

JSNIA0019GB

JSNIA0616GB


< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >7. Each meter activates during pressing trip A/B reset switch.
NOTE:• If any of the meter and gages is not activated, replace combination meter.• The figure is reference.

JSNIA0021GB


WI

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A) INFOID:0000000004246382

CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMSCONSULT-III can perform the following diagnosis modes with CAN communication with the unified meter andA/C amp.

SELF DIAG RESULTRefer to MWI-99, "DTC Index".

DATA MONITOR

Display Item ListX: Applicable

System Diagnosis mode Description

METER/M&ASelf Diagnostic Result Unified meter and A/C amp. checks the conditions and displays memorized error.

Data Monitor Displays unified meter and A/C amp. input/output data in real time.

Display item [Unit]MAIN

SIGNALSDescription

SPEED METER[km/h]

X

Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.NOTE:655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.

SPEED OUTPUT[km/h]

X

Vehicle speed signal value transmitted to other units with CAN communication line.NOTE:655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.

ODO OUTPUT[km]

Odometer signal value transmitted to other units with CAN communication line.

TACHO METER[rpm]

X

Value of the engine speed signal received from ECM with CAN communication line.NOTE:8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.

FUEL METER[L]

X Fuel level indicated on combination meter.

W TEMP METER[°C]

X

Value of engine coolant temperature signal received from ECM with CAN commu-nication line. NOTE:215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input.

ABS W/L[On/Off]

Status of ABS warning lamp judged from ABS warning lamp signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.

VDC/TCS IND[On/Off]

Status of VDC OFF indicator lamp judged from VDC OFF indicator lamp signal re-ceived from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.

SLIP IND[On/Off]

Status of SLIP indicator lamp judged from slip indicator lamp signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.

BRAKE W/L[On/Off]

Status of brake warning lamp judged from brake warning lamp signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line.NOTE:Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts, the parking brake switch is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON.

DOOR W/L[On/Off]

Status of door warning judged from door switch signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

TRUNK/GLAS-H[On/Off]

Status of trunk warning judged from trunk switch signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.


HI-BEAM IND[On/Off]

Status of high beam indicator lamp judged from high beam request signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

TURN IND[On/Off]

Status of turn indicator lamp judged from turn indicator signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

FR FOG IND[On/Off]

This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

RR FOG IND[Off]


LIGHT IND[On/Off]

Status of light indicator lamp judged from position light request signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

OIL W/L[On/Off]

Status of oil pressure warning lamp judged from oil pressure switch signal re-ceived from IPDM E/R with CAN communication line.

MIL[On/Off]

Status of malfunction indicator lamp judged from malfunctioning indicator lamp signal received from ECM with CAN communication line.

GLOW IND[On/Off]


C-ENG2 W/L[On/Off]


CRUISE IND[On/Off]

Status of CRUISE indicator judged from ASCD status signal received from ECM with CAN communication line.

SET IND[On/Off]

Status of SET indicator judged from ASCD SET indicator signal received from ECM with CAN communication line.

CRUISE W/L[On/Off]

Status of CRUISE warning lamp judged from ASCD status signal received from ECM with CAN communication line.

BA W/L[Off]


ATC/T-AMT W/L[On/Off]

Status of A/T check warning lamp judged from A/T check indicator signal received from TCM with CAN communication line.

4WD W/L[On/Off]

Status of AWD warning lamp judged from AWD warning lamp signal received from AWD control unit with CAN communication line.

4WD LOCK IND[Off]


FUEL W/L[On/Off]

Low-fuel warning lamp status judged by the identified fuel level.

WASHER W/L[On/Off]

Status of washer warning lamp judged from washer level switch input to combina-tion meter.

AIR PRES W/L[On/Off]

Status of low tire pressure warning lamp judged from tire pressure signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

KEY G/Y W/L[On/Off]

Status of key warning lamp (G/Y) judged from key warning signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

AFS OFF IND[On/Off]

Status of AFS OFF indicator lamp judged from AFS OFF indicator lamp signal re-ceived from AFS control unit with CAN communication line.

4WAS/RAS W/L[On/Off]

Status of 4WAS warning lamp judged from 4WAS warning lamp signal received from 4WAS main control unit with CAN communication line.

DDS W/L[On/Off]


LANE W/L[On/Off]


LDP IND[On/Off]



SIGNALSDescription


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


LCD[B&P N, B&P I, ID NG, ROTAT, SFT P, INSRT, BATT, NO KY,OUTKY, LK WN, C&P N, C&P I]

Displays status of Intelligent Key system warning judged from meter display signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.

ACC TARGET[On/Off]

Status of vehicle ahead detection indicator judged from meter display signal re-ceived from ICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication line.

ACC DISTANCE[Off, SHOR, MID, LONG]

Status of set distance indicator judged from meter display signal received from ICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication line.

ACC OWN VHL[On/Off]

Status of own vehicle indicator judged from meter display signal received from ICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication line.

ACC SET SPEEDDisplay ICC set vehicle speed from meter display signal received from ICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication line.

ACC UNIT[On/Off]

Status of display unit judged from meter display signal received from ICC sensor integrated unit with CAN communication line.

O/D OFF SW[On/Off]


SHIFT IND[P, R, N, D, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, M7]

Status of shift position indicator judged from shift position signal and manual mode indicator signal received from TCM with CAN communication line.

AT S MODE SW[On/Off]

Status of snow mode switch.

AT P MODE SW[On/Off]


M RANGE SW[On/Off]

Status of manual mode switch.

NM RANGE SW[On/Off]

Status of not manual mode switch.

AT SFT UP SW[On/Off]

Status of A/T shift up switch.

AT SFT DWN SW[On/Off]

Status of A/T shift down switch.

ST SFT UP SW[On/Off]

Status of paddle shifter up switch.

ST SFT DWN SW[On/Off]

Status of paddle shifter down switch.

COMP F/B SIG[On/Off]

A/C compressor activation condition that ECM judges according to the water tem-perature and the acceleration degree.

4WD LOCK SW[Off]


PKB SW[On/Off]

Status of parking brake switch.

BUCKLE SW[On/Off]

Status of seat belt buckle switch.

BRAKE OIL SW[On/Off]

Status of brake fluid level switch.

DISTANCE[km]

Value of possible driving distance calculated by unified meter and A/C amp.

OUTSIDE TEMP[°C or °F]

Ambient air temperature value converted from ambient sensor signal received from ambient sensor.NOTE:This may not match with the temperature value indicated on the information dis-play. (Because the information display value is a corrected value from the ambient sensor input value.)


SIGNALSDescription


NOTE:

Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.

FUEL LOW SIG[On/Off]

Status of fuel level low warning signal to output to AV control unit with CAN com-munication line.

BUZZER [On/Off]

XBuzzer status (in the combination meter) is judged with the buzzer output signal received from each unit with CAN communication line and the warning output con-dition of the combination meter.


SIGNALSDescription


WI

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSISU1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT


CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with othercontrol units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with twocommunication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-27, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".

DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004246384

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”. Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?YES >> Refer to LAN-18, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

DTCDisplay contents of

CONSULT-IIIDiagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUITWhen unified meter and A/C amp. is not trans-mitting or receiving CAN communication sig-nal for 2 seconds or more.

CAN communication system


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)


Initial diagnosis of unified meter and A/C amp.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.REPLACE UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace unified meter and A/C amp.

>> INSPECTION END

DTCDisplay contents of CON-

SULT-IIIDiagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)If any malfunction is detected during initial di-agnosis of unified meter and A/C amp. CAN controller



WI

B2201 COMMUNICATION ERROR 1

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M




The communication line (LCD <-> AMP.) is used to communicate signals between the combination meter andthe unified meter and A/C amp. in order to control the information display.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

Check combination meter, unified meter and A/C amp. and terminals (combination meter side, unified meterand A/C amp. side, and harness side) for looseness or bent.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair terminal or connector.

2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and unified meter and A/C amp.

harness connector terminal.

4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. Connect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.



B2201 COMM ERROR 1If a communication error is present in the communication line (LCD <-> AMP.) for 2 sec-onds or more

Communication line (LCD <-> AMP.) circuit

Combination meter Unified meter and A/C amp.Continuity

Connector Terminals Connector Terminals

M5324

M6614

Existed25 34

Combination meter

Ground

ContinuityConnector Terminals

M5324

Not existed25


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp.

4.CHECK COMBINATION METER OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Connect combination meter connector.4. Turn ignition switch ON.5. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace combination meter.

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)

(–)Unified meter and A/C amp.

Connector Terminal

M66 14 Ground 12 V

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)

(–)Combination meter

Connector Terminal

M53 25 Ground 5 V


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M




The communication line (METER <-> AMP.) is used to communicate signals between the combination meterand the unified meter and A/C amp. in order to control the information display.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.CHECK CONNECTOR

Check combination meter, unified meter and A/C amp. and terminals (combination meter side, unified meterand A/C amp. side, and harness side) for looseness or bent.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair terminal or connector.

2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and unified meter and A/C amp.

harness connector terminal.


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. Connect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.



B2202 COMM ERROR 2If a communication error is present in the communication line (METER <-> AMP.) for 2 seconds or more

Communication line (METER <-> AMP.) circuit

Combination meter Unified meter and A/C amp.Continuity


M532

M6627

Existed3 7

Combination meter

Ground


M532

Not existed3


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp.

4.CHECK COMBINATION METER OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Connect combination meter connector.4. Turn ignition switch ON.5. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace combination meter.

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminal

M66 27 Ground 5 V

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminal

M53 3 Ground 5 V


WI

B2205 VEHICLE SPEED

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


B2205 VEHICLE SPEED


Vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communicationto unified meter and A/C amp.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), and repair or replace malfunc-tioning parts.

>> Refer to BRC-26, "CONSULT-III Function".



B2205 VEHICLE SPEEDIf the abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more

• Wheel sensor• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)


B2267 ENGINE SPEED
B2267 ENGINE SPEED


The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to the unified meter and A/C amp. with CAN communica-tion.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM

Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of ECM, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

>> Refer to EC-125, "CONSULT-III Function".



B2267 ENGINE SPEEDIf ECM continuously transmits abnormal en-gine speed signals for 2 seconds or more

• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)• ECM


WI

B2268 WATER TEMP

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


B2268 WATER TEMP


The engine coolant temperature signal is transmitted from ECM to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CANcommunication.


DTC DETECTION LOGIC


1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM

Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of ECM, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

>> Refer to EC-125, "CONSULT-III Function".



B2268 WATER TEMPIf ECM continuously transmits abnormal en-gine coolant temperature signals for 60 sec-onds or more

• Engine coolant temperature sensor• ECM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITCOMBINATION METER

COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004246404

1.CHECK FUSE

Check for blown fuses.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.


Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Check harness between combination meter and fuse.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector.3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair harness or connector.

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.

UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004246405

1.CHECK FUSE

Check for blown fuses.

Power source Fuse No.

Battery 11

Ignition switch ON or START 4

Terminals

Ignition switchVoltage

(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminals

M531

GroundOFF

Battery voltage21 ON

Combination meter

Ground


M53

5

Existed15

22


Battery 11


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.


Check voltage between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Check harness between unified meter and A/C amp. and fuse.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.3. Check continuity between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.


IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) : Di-agnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004704601

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK

Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible links are not blown.

Is the fuse fusing?YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is

blown.NO >> GO TO 2.


Ignition switch ACC or ON 19

Ignition switch ON or START 3


Terminals

Ignition switchVoltage

(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminals

M67

54

Ground

OFF

Battery voltage41 ACC

53 ON


Ground


M6755

Existed71

Signal name Fuses and fusible link No.

Battery power supply

C

50

51


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and the ground.
Is the measurement value normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair the harness or connector.


Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and the ground.

Does continuity exist?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair the harness or connector.

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)(−)

IPDM E/R

Connector TerminalGround

E4 1 Battery voltage

IPDM E/R

Ground


E5 12Existed

E6 41


WI

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M




The fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (main) and the fuel level sensor unit (sub) detect the fuel level in thefuel tank and transmit the fuel gauge signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.


1.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and compare the “FUEL METER” monitor value with the

fuel gauge reading on the combination meter.

Does monitor value match fuel gauge reading?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace combination meter.


1.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check voltage between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.

Does it match fuel gauge reading?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace the unified meter and A/C amp.

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (SUB) CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector and fuel level sensor unit (sub) connector.3. Check continuity between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and fuel level sensor

unit (sub) harness connector terminal.

Fuel gauge pointer Reference value of data monitor [lit.]

Full Approx. 72.8

Three quarters Approx. 59.2

Half Approx. 40.0

A quarter Approx. 20.8

Empty Approx. 5.6

Terminal

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminal

M67 42 Ground

JSNIA0013GB


4. Check continuity between unified meter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?OK >> GO TO 3.NG >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (MAIN-SUB) CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (main) connector.2. Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit (sub) harness connector terminal and fuel level sensor

unit and fuel pump (main) harness connector terminal.

3. Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit (sub) harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?OK >> GO TO 4.NG >> Repair harness or connector.

4.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (MAIN) CIRCUIT

Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (main) harness connector terminal and unifiedmeter and A/C amp. harness connector terminal.

Is the inspection result normal?OK >> INSPECTION ENDNG >> Repair harness or connector.

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004246412

1.REMOVE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Remove the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT AND FUEL PUMP (MAIN)

Unified meter and A/C amp. Fuel level sensor unit (sub)Continuity




GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M67 42 Not existed

Fuel level sensor unit (sub) Fuel level sensor unit (main)Continuity


B21 2 B22 2 Existed

Fuel level sensor unit (sub)

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

B21 2 Not existed

Fuel level sensor unit (main) Unified meter and A/C amp.Continuity


B22 5 M67 58 Existed


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Check the resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump(main).

Standard float position

Is the inspection result OK?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (main).

3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (SUB)

Inspect the resistance of fuel level sensor unit (sub).

Standard float position

Is the inspection result OK?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit (sub).

Terminal Float position Resistance value (Ω)

2 5Full (A) Approx. 3

Empty (B) Approx. 80

JPNIA0841ZZ

Float position [mm (in)]

Full Approx. 206.1 (8.11)

Empty Approx. 34.5 (1.36)

Terminal Float position Resistance value (Ω)

1 2Full (A) Approx. 3

Empty (B) Approx. 42.5

JPNIA1261ZZ

Float position [mm (in)]

Full Approx. 5.5 (0.22)

Empty Approx. 176.8 (6.96)


METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Transmits the following signals to the combination meter.


1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.2. Measure voltage between the following terminals of the combination meter.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the combination meter and meter control switch connectors.3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and meter control switch har-

ness connector terminal.


• (Illumination control) switch signal (+) • (Illumination control) switch signal (–)

• Trip A/B reset switch signal • (select) switch signal

• (enter) switch is pressed

Terminal No.

ConditionVoltage

(Approx.)

36 - 16When (select) switch is pressed 0 V


37 - 16When (enter) switch is pressed 0 V


38 - 16When trip A/B reset switch is pressed 0 V


39 - 16When (illumination control) switch is pressed

0 V


40 - 16When (illumination control) switch is pressed

0 V


Combination meter Meter control switchContinuity


M53

16

M54

7

Existed

36 2

37 1

39 10

40 9

38 5


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M




1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH UNIT

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect the meter control switch connector.3. Check continuity of the meter control switch.

Is the inspection result OK?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the meter control switch.

Combination meter

Ground


M53

36

Not existed

37

39

40

38

Connector Terminal No. Operation and status Continuity

M54

2 7When (select) switch is pressed Existed

Other than the above Not existed

1 7When (enter) switch is pressed Existed


5 7When trip A/B reset switch is pressed Existed


10 7When (illumination control) switch is pressed

Existed


9 7When (illumination control) switch is pressed

Existed



OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Detects the engine oil pressure and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to IPDM E/R.



1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “OIL W/L” monitor value.

>> INSPECTION END


1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector.3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and oil pressure switch harness connec-

tor terminal.

4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground.



1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Check continuity between oil pressure switch and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?

“OIL W/L”

Ignition switch ON : On

Engine running : Off

IPDM E/R Oil pressure switchContinuity


E7 75 F37 1 Existed

IPDM E/R

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

E7 75 Not existed

Condition Continuity

Engine stopped Existed

Engine running Not existed

ELF0044D


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace the oil pressure switch.


PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.



1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “PKB SW” monitor value.

>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure (A/T models) INFOID:0000000004246422

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check the voltage and waveform between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.


2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and parking brake switch har-



“PKB SW”

Parking brake is applied : On

Parking brake is released : Off

Terminal

ConditionVoltage

(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminal

M53 27 Ground



JSNIA0007GB

Combination meter Parking brake switchContinuity


M53 27 E107 1 Existed


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



Diagnosis Procedure (M/T models) INFOID:0000000004246423

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.2. Check the voltage and waveform between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.



1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and parking brake switch har-





1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Combination meter

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M53 27 Not existed

Terminals

ConditionVoltage

(Approx.)

(+)


Connector Terminal

M53 27 Ground



JSNIA0007GB

Combination meter Parking brake switchContinuity



Combination meter

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M53 27 Not existed


< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-72, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace parking brake switch.

WI

WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter.


1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect combination meter connector and washer level switch connector.3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and washer level switch har-



Is the inspection result normal? YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Repair harness or connector.


1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.2. Disconnect washer level switch connector. 3. Check washer level switch.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> INSPECTION ENDNO >> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-89, "Removal and Installation".

Combination meter Washer level switchContinuity


M53 31 E32 1 Existed

Combination meter

GroundContinuity

Connector Terminal

M53 31 Not existed

Terminal Washer level switch Continuity

1 2ON Existed

OFF Not existed


COMPASS
COMPASS

Wiring Diagram - COMPASS - INFOID:0000000004246428

JCNWM1759GB


WI

COMPASS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1760GB


CLOCK
CLOCK

Wiring Diagram - CLOCK - INFOID:0000000004246429

JCNWM1761GB


WI

CLOCK

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1762GB


COMBINATION METER
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATIONCOMBINATION METER


VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOLRefer to MWI-82, "Reference Value".

TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JSNIA0457ZZ


Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

1(V)


— Battery voltage

2(LG)

GroundCommunication signal (METER→ AMP.)


—

3(GR)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP.→ METER)


—

5(B)


— 0 V

6(W)

Ground Alternator signal InputIgnition switch ON

Charge warning lamp ON 0 V

Charge warning lamp OFF 12 V

7(LG)

Ground Air bag signal InputIgnition switch ON

Air bag warning lamp ON 4 V

Air bag warning lamp OFF 0 V

10(R)

Ground Security signal InputIgnition switch OFF

Security warning lamp ON 0 V

Security warning lamp OFF 12 V

JSNIA0027GB

JSNIA0027GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


15(B)


— 0 V

16(B)

Ground Meter control switch ground —Ignition switch ON

— 0 V

21(R)


— 12 V

22(B)


— 0 V

24(BR)

GroundCommunication signal (LCD→ AMP.)


—

25(Y)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP.→ LCD)


—

26(R)

GroundVehicle speed signal(8-pulse)




27(O)





Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0028GB

JSNIA0027GB

JSNIA0012GB

JSNIA0007GB


COMBINATION METER
28(LG)





0 V

29(LG)



When driver seat belt is fas-tened

12 V

When driver seat belt is un-fastened

0 V

30(G)

GroundSeat belt buckle switch sig-nal (passenger side)



• When passenger seat belt is fastened

12 V


• When passenger seat belt is unfastened

0 V

31(L)

Ground Washer level switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

Washer level switch ON 0 V

Washer level switch OFF 5 V

33(R)

Ground Illumination control signal OutputIgnition switch ON

Lighting switch ON, then operate the illumination control switch.

NOTE:When brightness level is midway

36(LG)

16(B)

Select switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When is pressed 0 V


37(SB)

16(B)

Enter switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When is pressed 0 V


38(L)

16(B)

Trip A/B reset switch signal InputIgnition switch ON

When trip A/B reset switch is pressed

0 V


39(P)

16(B)

Illumination control switch signal (–)



0 V


40(O)

16(B)

Illumination control switch signal (+)



0 V



Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0008GB

JSNIA0010GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



JCNWM1749GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1750GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1751GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1752GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1753GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1754GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1755GB


COMBINATION METER
JCNWM1756GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1757GB


COMBINATION METER

FAIL SAFECombination meter performs fail-safe operation when unified meter and A/C amp. communication is malfunc-tion.Solution for communication error between the unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter.

JCNWM1758GB


WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



Refer to MWI-99, "DTC Index".


Speedometer

Reset to zero by suspending communication.Tachometer

Fuel gauge






ABS warning lamp



SLIP indicator lamp

Brake warning lamp

CRUISE warning lamp

High beam indicator






Low tire pressure warning lamp

Key warning lamp

AFS OFF indicator lamp

4WAS warning lamp

Master warning lamp

AWD warning lamp





CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM


SPEED METER[km/h]

Ignition switch ON

While driving

Equivalent to speedometer readingNOTE:655.35 is displayed when the malfunc-tion signal is received

SPEED OUTPUT[km/h]

Ignition switch ON

While driving

Equivalent to speedometer readingNOTE:655.35 is displayed when the malfunc-tion signal is received

ODO OUTPUT[km]

Ignition switch ON

—Equivalent to odometer reading in combination meter

TACHO METER[rpm]

Ignition switch ON

While driving

Equivalent to tachometer readingNOTE:8191.875 is displayed when the mal-function signal is received

FUEL METER[L]

Ignition switch ON

— Values according to fuel level

W TEMP METER[°C]

Ignition switch ON

—

Values according to engine coolant temperatureNOTE:215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input

ABS W/LIgnition switch ON

ABS warning lamp ON On

ABS warning lamp OFF Off

VDC/TCS INDIgnition switch ON

VDC OFF indicator lamp ON On

VDC OFF indicator lamp OFF Off

SLIP INDIgnition switch ON

SLIP indicator lamp ON On

SLIP indicator lamp OFF Off

BRAKE W/LIgnition switch ON

Blake warning lamp ON On

Blake warning lamp OFF Off

DOOR W/LIgnition switch ON

Door warning displayed On

Door warning not displayed Off

TRUNK/GLAS-HIgnition switch ON

Trunk warning displayed On

Trunk warning not displayed Off

HI-BEAM INDIgnition switch ON

Hi-beam indicator lamp ON On

Hi-beam indicator lamp OFF Off

TURN INDIgnition switch ON

Turn indicator lamp ON On

Turn indicator lamp OFF Off

FR FOG INDIgnition switch ON

NOTE:This item is displayed, but cannot be moni-tored.

Off

RR FOG INDIgnition switch ON


Off

LIGHT INDIgnition switch ON


Off


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


OIL W/L Ignition switch ON

Oil pressure warning lamp ON On

Oil pressure warning lamp OFF Off

MILIgnition switch ON

Malfunction warning lamp ON On

Malfunction warning lamp OFF Off

GLOW INDIgnition switch ON


Off

C-ENG2 W/LIgnition switch ON


Off

CRUISE INDIgnition switch ON

Cruise indicator displayed On

Cruise indicator not displayed Off

SET INDIgnition switch ON

Set indicator lamp ON On

Set indicator lamp OFF Off

CRUISE W/L Ignition switch ON

Cruise warning lamp ON On

Cruise warning lamp OFF Off

BA W/LIgnition switch ON


Off

ATC/T-AMT W/LIgnition switch ON

A/T check warning lamp ON On

A/T check warning lamp OFF Off

4WD W/LIgnition switch ON

AWD warning lamp ON On

AWD warning lamp OFF Off

4WD LOCK INDIgnition switch ON


Off

FUEL W/L Ignition switch ON

Low-fuel warning lamp displayed On

Low-fuel warning lamp not displayed Off

WASHER W/LIgnition switch ON

Washer warning displayed On

Washer warning not displayed Off

AIR PRES W/L Ignition switch ON

Low tire pressure lamp ON On

Low tire pressure lamp OFF Off

KEY G/Y W/L Ignition switch ON

Key warning lamp ON On

Key warning lamp OFF Off

AFS OFF INDIgnition switch ON

AFS OFF indicator lamp ON On

AFS OFF indicator lamp OFF Off

4WAS/RAS W/LIgnition switch ON

4WAS warning lamp ON On

4WAS warning lamp OFF Off

DDS W/LIgnition switch ON


Off

LANE W/LIgnition switch ON


Off

LDP INDIgnition switch ON


Off



LCD

Ignition switch ON

Engine start information display (A/T model) B&P I

Engine start information display (M/T model) C&P I

Ignition switch ACC

Engine start information display (A/T model) B&P N

Engine start information display (M/T model) C&P N

Ignition switch LOCK

Key ID warning display ID NG


Steering lock information display ROTAT


P position warning display SFT P


Intelligent Key insert information display INSRT


Intelligent Key low battery warning display BATT

Ignition switch ON

Take away warning display NO KY


Key warning display OUTKY

Ignition switch ON

ICC sensor integrated unit warning display LK WN

ACC TARGETIgnition switch ON

Vehicle ahead detection indicator displayed On

Vehicle ahead detection indicator not dis-played

Off

ACC DISTANCEIgnition switch ON

When following distance set to "LONG" LONG

When following distance set to "MIDDLE" MID

When following distance set to "SHORT" SHORT

Set distance indicator not displayed Off

ACC OWN VHLIgnition switch ON

Own vehicle indicator displayed On

Own vehicle indicator not displayed Off

ACC SET SPEEDIgnition switch ON

ICC set vehicle speed display Vehicle speed

ACC UNITIgnition switch ON

Set vehicle speed indicator unit display ON On

Set vehicle speed indicator unit display OFF Off

O/D OFF SWIgnition switch ON


Off

SHIFT INDIgnition switch ON

Shift position indicator P display P

Shift position indicator R display R

Shift position indicator N display N

Shift position indicator D display D

Shift position indicator M1 display M1









WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


NOTE:

Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AT S MODE SWIgnition switch ON

Snow mode switch ON On

Snow mode switch OFF Off

AT P MODE SWIgnition switch ON


Off

M RANGE SWIgnition switch ON

Selector lever DS position On

Other than the above Off

NM RANGE SWIgnition switch ON

Selector lever DS position Off

Other than the above On

AT SFT UP SWIgnition switch ON

Selector lever up position On


AT SFT DWN SWIgnition switch ON

Selector lever – position On


ST SFT UP SWIgnition switch ON

Paddle shifter up operation On


ST SFT DWN SWIgnition switch ON

Paddle shifter down operation On


COMP F/B SIGIgnition switch ON

A/C compressor activation condition On

A/C compressor deactivation condition Off

4WD LOCK SWIgnition switch ON


Off

PKB SWIgnition switch ON

Parking brake applied On

Parking brake released Off

BUCKLE SWIgnition switch ON

Seat belt (driver side) unfastened On

Seat belt (driver side) fastened Off

BRAKE OIL SWIgnition switch ON

Brake fluid level is lower than the low level On

Brake fluid level is normal Off

DISTANCE[km]

Ignition switch ON

—Possible driving distance calculated by unified meter and A/C amp.

OUTSIDE TEMP[°C] or [°F]

Ignition switch ON

—

Equivalent to ambient temperatureNOTE:This may not match the indicated val-ue on the information display.

FUEL LOW SIGIgnition switch ON

Low-fuel warning signal output On

Low-fuel warning signal not output Off

BUZZERIgnition switch ON

Buzzer ON On

Buzzer OFF Off



PHYSICAL VALUES

JSNIA0097ZZ


Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

4(P)

Ground Stop lamp switch signal InputIgnition switch OFF

Brake pedal is depressed 12 V


5(L)

GroundManual mode shift up sig-nal


Selector lever up position 0 V


6(O)

Ground Paddle shifter up signal InputIgnition switch ON

Paddle shifter up operation 0 V


7(GR)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP. → METER)


—

8(L)

GroundVehicle speed signal output(2-pulse)




9(SB)



When seat belt (driver side) is fastened

12 V

When seat belt (driver side) is unfastened

0 V

10(W)

Ground Manual mode signal InputIgnition switch ON

Selector lever DS position 0 V


11(G)

Ground Not manual mode signal InputIgnition switch ON

Selector lever DS position 12 V


SKIA3362E

JSNIA0015GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


14(BR)

GroundCommunication signal (LCD → AMP.)


—

23(L)

Ground A/T snow switch signal InputIgnition switch

ON

Snow mode switch ON 12 V

Snow mode switch OFF 0 V

25(V)

GroundManual mode shift down signal


Selector lever down posi-tion

0 V


26(G)

Ground Paddle shift down signal InputIgnition switch ON

Paddle shifter down opera-tion

0 V


27(LG)

GroundCommunication signal (METER → AMP.)


—

28(R)

GroundVehicle speed signal output(8-pulse)




30(V)




34(Y)

GroundCommunication signal (AMP. → LCD)


—


Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0028GB

SKIA3361E

JSNIA0012GB

JSNIA0007GB

JSNIA0027GB


41(L)

Ground ACC power supply InputIgnition switch ACC

— Battery voltage

42(BR)

Ground Fuel level sensor signal InputIgnition switch ON

—

45(V)

Ground Ambient sensor signal Input — —

53(W)


— Battery voltage

54(Y)


— Battery voltage

55(B)


— 0 V

56(L)

Ground CAN-H — — — —

57(BR)





0 V

58(Y)

GroundFuel level sensor signal ground

—Ignition switch ON

— 0 V

61(R)

GroundAmbient sensor signal ground

—Ignition switch ON

— 0 V

71(GR)


— 0 V

72(P)

Ground CAN-L — — — —


Description

ConditionValue


Input/Output

JSNIA0013GB

JSNIA0014GB

JSNIA0008GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



JCNWM1749GB


JCNWM1750GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1751GB


JCNWM1752GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1753GB


JCNWM1754GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1755GB


JCNWM1756GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCNWM1757GB



FAIL SAFEThe unified meter and A/C amp. activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunc-tioning.

JCNWM1758GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



NOTE:The details of TIME display are as follows.• CRNT: The malfunctions that are detected now.• PAST: The malfunctions was detected in the past. IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame data).


SpeedometerReset to zero by suspending communication.

Tachometer

Fuel gauge Indicates fuel level

Water temperature gauge Reset to zero by suspending communication.





ABS warning lamp



SLIP indicator lamp

Brake warning lamp

AWD warning lamp

4WAS warning lamp

CRUISE warning lamp

Low tire pressure warning lamp The lamp turns ON after flashing for 1 minute.

AFS OFF indicator lamp The lamp blinking caused by communication malfunction

High beam indicator






Key warning lamp

Master warning lamp

Display contents of CONSULT-III Time Diagnostic item is detected when... Refer to

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT CRNT PASTWhen unified meter and A/C amp. is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-41

U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CRNT PASTWhen detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN control-ler of unified meter and A/C amp.

MWI-42

B2201: COMM ERROR 1 CRNT PASTIf a communication error is present in the communication line between unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-43

B2202: COMM ERROR 2 CRNT PASTIf a communication error is present in the communication line between unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-45

B2205: VEHICLE SPEED CRNT PASTThe abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-47

B2267: ENGINE SPEED CRNT PASTIf ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-48

B2268: WATER TEMP CRNT PASTIf ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temper-ature signals for 60 seconds or more.

MWI-49


< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >- 1 - 39: The number is indicated when it is normal at present and a malfunction was detected in the past. It
increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF → ON. It isfixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. It returns to 0 when a malfunction isdetected again in the process.


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINEROOM)




RAD FAN REQ Engine idle speed

Changes depending on engine coolant temperature, air conditioner operation status, vehicle speed, etc.

0 - 100 %

AC COMP REQ Engine running

A/C switch OFF Off

A/C switch ON(Compressor is operating)

On

TAIL&CLR REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND, HI or AUTO (Light is illuminated) On

HL LO REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch 2ND HI or AUTO (Light is illuminated) On

HL HI REQLighting switch OFF Off

Lighting switch HI On

FR FOG REQLighting switch 2ND orAUTO (Light is illuminated)

Front fog lamp switch OFF Off

• Front fog lamp switch ON• Daytime running light activated

(Only for Canada)On

FR WIP REQ Ignition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF Stop

Front wiper switch INT 1LOW

Front wiper switch LO Low

Front wiper switch HI Hi

WIP AUTO STOP Ignition switch ON

Front wiper stop position STOP P

Any position other than front wiper stop position

ACT P

WIP PROT Ignition switch ON

Front wiper operates normally Off

Front wiper stops at fail-safe opera-tion

BLOCK

IGN RLY1 -REQIgnition switch OFF or ACC Off

Ignition switch ON On

IGN RLYIgnition switch OFF or ACC Off

Ignition switch ON On

PUSH SWRelease the push-button ignition switch Off

Press the push-button ignition switch On

INTER/NP SW

Ignition switch ON

Selector lever in any position other than P or N (A/T models) Off

Release clutch pedal (M/T models)

Ignition switch ON

Selector lever in P or N position (A/T models) On

Depress clutch pedal (M/T models)

ST RLY CONTIgnition switch ON Off

At engine cranking On


IHBT RLY -REQIgnition switch ON Off

At engine cranking On

ST/INHI RLY

Ignition switch ON Off

At engine cranking INHI ON → ST ON

The status of starter relay or starter control relay cannot be recognized by the battery voltage malfunction, etc. when the starter relay is ON and the starter control relay is OFF

UNKWN

DETENT SW

Ignition switch ON

• Press the selector button with se-lector lever in P position

• Selector lever in any position oth-er than P

Off

Release the selector button with selector lever in P positionNOTE: Fixed On for M/T models

On

S/L RLY -REQ

None of the conditions below are present Off

• Open the driver door after the ignition switch is turned OFF (for a few seconds)

• Press the push-button ignition switch when the steering lock is activat-ed

• Depress the clutch pedal when the steering lock is activated

On

S/L STATE

Steering lock is activated LOCK

Steering lock is deactivated UNLOCK

[DTC: B210A] is detected UNKWN

DTRL REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

OIL P SWIgnition switch OFF, ACC or engine running Open

Ignition switch ON Close

HOOD SWClose the hood Off

Open the hood On

HL WASHER REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off

THFT HRN REQ

Not operation Off

• Panic alarm is activated• Horn is activated with VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYS-

TEMOn

HORN CHIRPNot operating Off

Door locking with Intelligent Key (horn chirp mode) On

CRNRNG LMP REQNOTE:The item is indicated, but not monitored.

Off



WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


TERMINAL LAYOUT

PHYSICAL VALUES

JSMIA0001ZZ


Description

ConditionValue

(Approx.)Signal nameInput/ Output+ −

1(W)


2(L)


4(V)

Ground Front wiper LO OutputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF 0 V

Front wiper switch LO Battery voltage

5(L)

Ground Front wiper HI OutputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper switch OFF 0 V

Front wiper switch HI Battery voltage

7(R)

GroundTail, license plate lamps & illuminations


Lighting switch OFF 0 V

Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage

11(BR)

GroundSteering lock unit power supply

Output

Ignition switch OFF

A few seconds after open-ing the driver door

Battery voltage


Press the push-button ig-nition switch

Battery voltage

Ignition switch ACC or ON 0 V

12(B/W)



13(Y)

Ground Fuel pump power supply Output

Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON

0 V

• Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON

• Engine runningBattery voltage

16(LG)

Ground Front wiper auto stop InputIgnition switch ON

Front wiper stop position 0 V

Any position other than front wiper stop position

Battery voltage

19(W)

Ground Ignition relay power supply OutputIgnition switch OFF 0 V

Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

25(G)



26*1

(R)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output

Ignition switch OFF 0 V


27(O)

Ground Ignition relay monitor InputIgnition switch OFF or ACC Battery voltage

Ignition switch ON 0 V

28(L)

GroundPush-button ignition switch

InputPress the push-button ignition switch 0 V

Release the push-button ignition switch Battery voltage

30(GR)

Ground Starter relay control Input

A/T mod-els

Selector lever in any posi-tion other than P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

0 V

Selector lever P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

Battery voltage

M/T mod-els

Release the clutch pedal 0 V

Depress the clutch pedal Battery voltage

32(V)

GroundSteering lock unit condi-tion-1

InputSteering lock is activated 0 V

Steering lock is deactivated Battery voltage

33(P)

GroundSteering lock unit condi-tion-2

InputSteering lock is activated Battery voltage

Steering lock is deactivated 0 V

36(G)


39(P)

— CAN-LInput/ Output

— —

40(L)

— CAN-HInput/ Output

— —

41(B/W)


42(Y)

Ground Cooling fan relay control InputIgnition switch OFF or ACC 0 V

Ignition switch ON 0.7 V

43*2

(SB)Ground

A/T shift selector(Detention switch)


Press the selector button (selector lever P)

Battery voltage

• Selector lever in any po-sition other than P

• Release the selector button (selector lever P)

0 V

44(W)

Ground Horn relay control InputThe horn is deactivated Battery voltage

The horn is activated 0 V


Description

ConditionValue



WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


45(G)

Ground Anti theft horn relay control InputThe horn is deactivated Battery voltage

The horn is activated 0 V

46

(W)*2

(P)*3Ground Starter relay control Input

A/T mod-els

Selector lever in any posi-tion other than P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

0 V

Selector lever P or N (Igni-tion switch ON)

Battery voltage

M/T mod-els

Release the clutch pedal 0 V

Depress the clutch pedal Battery voltage

48(BR)

Ground A/C relay power supply OutputEngine running

A/C switch OFF 0 V

A/C switch ON(A/C compressor is oper-ating)

Battery voltage

49(O)

Ground ECM relay power supply Output

Ignition switch OFF(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)

0 V

• Ignition switch ON• Ignition switch OFF

(For a few seconds after turning igni-tion switch OFF)

Battery voltage

51(Y)



53(W)

Ground ECM relay power supply Output


0 V



Battery voltage

54(P)

GroundThrottle control motor re-lay power supply

Output


0 V



Battery voltage

55(SB)

Ground ECM power supply Output Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage

56(LG)



57(G)



58*2

(L)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output



69(BR)

Ground ECM relay control Output


Battery voltage



0 - 1.5 V


Description

ConditionValue



70(O)

GroundThrottle control motor re-lay control

OutputIgnition switch ON → OFF

0 -1.0 V ↓

Battery voltage↓

0 V

Ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0 V

73*3

(P)Ground Ignition relay power supply Output



74(G)



75(SB)

Ground Oil pressure switch InputIgnition switch ON

Engine stopped 0 V

Engine running Battery voltage

76(Y)

GroundPower generation com-mand signal

Output

Ignition switch ON

6.3 V

40% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “AL-TERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”

3.8 V

80% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “AL-TERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”

1.4 V

77(R)

Ground Fuel pump relay control Output

• Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition switch ON

• Engine running0 - 1.0 V

Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

80(W)

Ground Starter motor Output At engine cranking Battery voltage

83(R)

Ground Headlamp LO (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON


Lighting switch 2ND Battery voltage

84(P)

Ground Headlamp LO (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON


Lighting switch 2ND Battery voltage


Description

ConditionValue


JPMIA0001GB

JPMIA0002GB

JPMIA0003GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


*1: Only for the models with ICC system

*2: A/T models only

*3: M/T models only

86(W)

Ground Front fog lamp (RH) OutputLighting switch 2ND

Front fog lamp switch OFF 0 V

• Front fog lamp switch ON

• Daytime running light activated (Only for Can-ada)

Battery voltage

87(L)

Ground Front fog lamp (LH) OutputLighting switch 2ND

Front fog lamp switch OFF 0 V

• Front fog lamp switch ON

• Daytime running light activated (Only for Can-ada)

Battery voltage

88(G)

GroundWasher pump power sup-ply

Output Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

89(BR)

Ground Headlamp HI (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON


• Lighting switch HI• Lighting switch PASS

Battery voltage

90(LG)

Ground Headlamp HI (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON


• Lighting switch HI• Lighting switch PASS

Battery voltage

91(P)

Ground Parking lamp (RH) OutputIgnition switch ON



92(O)

Ground Parking lamp (LH) OutputIgnition switch ON



97(V)

Ground Cooling fan control Output Engine idling 0 - 5 V

104(LG)

Ground Hood switch InputClose the hood Battery voltage

Open the hood 0 V


Description

ConditionValue



Wiring Diagram - IPDM E/R - INFOID:0000000004704598

JCMWM3058GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


JCMWM3059GB


JCMWM3060GB


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M



CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROLWhen CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CANcommunication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.

If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM

JCMWM3061GB


If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it. • IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation

coil circuit.• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to

alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

FRONT WIPER CONTROLIPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiperafter repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times.

Control part Fail-safe operation

Cooling fan• Outputs the pulse duty signal (PWM signal) 100% when the ignition switch is turned

ON• Outputs the pulse duty signal (PWM signal) 0% when the ignition switch is turned OFF

A/C compressor A/C relay OFF

Alternator Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0%

Control part Fail-safe operation

Headlamp• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF• Headlamp high relay OFF

• Parking lamps• Side maker lamp• License plate lamps• Illuminations• Tail lamps

• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF

Front wiper

• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.

• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating.

Horn Horn relay OFF

Ignition relay The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.

Starter motor Starter control relay OFF

Steering lock unit Steering lock relay OFF

Voltage judgment

IPDM E/R judgment OperationIgnition relay contact side

Ignition relay excitation coil side

ON ON Ignition relay ON normal —

OFF OFF Ignition relay OFF normal —

ON OFF Ignition relay ON stuck• Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON”• Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 min-

utes

OFF ON Ignition relay OFF stuck Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF”

Ignition switch Front wiper switch Front wiper stop position signal

ON

OFFThe front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.

ONThe front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >NOTE:This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.

STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONIPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remainsactive for 90 seconds.


NOTE:• The details of time display are as follows.- CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.- PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.• IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame data).- The number is 0 when is detected now.- The number increases like 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF →

ON.- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.

×: Applicable

CONSULT display Fail-safe Refer to

No DTC is detected.further testingmay be required.

— —

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT × PCS-14

B2098: IGN RELAY ON × PCS-15

B2099: IGN RELAY OFF — PCS-16

B2108: STRG LCK RELAY ON — SEC-104

B2109: STRG LCK RELAY OFF — SEC-106

B210A: STRG LCK STATE SW — SEC-107

B210B: START CONT RLY ON — SEC-111

B210C: START CONT RLY OFF — SEC-112

B210D: STARTER RELAY ON — SEC-113

B210E: STARTER RELAY OFF — SEC-114

B210F: INTRLCK/PNP SW ON — SEC-116

B2110: INTRLCK/PNP SW OFF — SEC-118


THE FUEL GAUGE POINTER DOES NOT MOVE
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSISTHE FUEL GAUGE POINTER DOES NOT MOVE


Fuel gauge needle will not move from a certain position.


1.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” of the “METER/M&A” and compare the “FUEL METER” monitor value with the

fuel gauge reading on the combination meter. Refer to MWI-53, "Component Function Check".Does monitor value match fuel gauge reading?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Replace combination meter.

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the fuel level sensor signal circuit. Refer to MWI-53, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to MWI-54, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".

4.CHECK FLOAT INTERFERENCE

Check that the float arm interferes with or binds to other components in the fuel tank.Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp.NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.


WI

THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE


If any of the following malfunctions is found for the meter control switch operation.• All switches are inoperative.• The specified switch cannot be operated.


1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the meter control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH

Check the meter control switch. Refer to MWI-57, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NG >> Replace meter control switch.


THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON


The oil pressure warning lamp stays off when the ignition switch is turned ON.


1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

Perform auto active test of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-9, "Diagnosis Description".Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 4.

2.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> Repair harness or connector.


Check the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-58, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. NO >> Replace oil pressure switch.


1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” of the “METER/M&A” and check the “OIL W/L” monitor value. Refer to MWI-58,

"Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".


WI

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF


The oil pressure warning lamp remains illuminated while the engine is running. (normal oil pressure)


1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

Perform auto active test of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-9, "Diagnosis Description".Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 5.

2.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.2. Turn ignition switch ON.3. Check voltage between the oil pressure switch harness connector terminal and ground.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NO >> GO TO 4.


Check the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-58, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-32, "Removal and Installation".NO >> Replace oil pressure switch.

4.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 5.NO >> Repair harness or connector.


1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” of the “METER/M&A” and check the “OIL W/L” monitor value. Refer to MWI-58,

"Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".

Terminals

Voltage(Approx.)

(+)

(–)Oil pressure switch

Connector Terminal

F37 1 Ground 12 V


THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY


THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING,OR DOES NOT DISPLAY


• The parking brake warning is displayed during vehicle travel even though the parking brake is released.• The parking brake warning is not displayed even though driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied.



1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Select the “Data Monitor” of the “METER/M&A” and check the “PKB SW” monitor value. Refer to MWI-60,

"Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> GO TO 2.


Check the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-60, "Diagnosis Procedure (A/T models)" or MWI-61, "Diagnosis Procedure (M/T models)". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 3.NG >> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Check the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-72, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace parking brake switch.


WI

THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, ORDOES NOT DISPLAY


• The warning is still displayed even after washer fluid is added.• The warning is not displayed even though the washer tank is empty.


1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the washer level switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-63, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

2.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH

Check the washer level switch. Refer to MWI-63, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-89, "Removal and Installation".


THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DIS-PLAY


THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOTDISPLAY


• The door ajar warning is displayed even though all of the doors are closed.• The door ajar warning is not displayed even though a door is ajar.


1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Check the BCM input signals. Refer to DLK-62, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 3.


Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “DOOR W/L” monitor value.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-81, "Removal and Installation".

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check the door switch. Refer to DLK-63, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace applicable door switch. Refer to DLK-237, "Removal and Installation".

“DOOR W/L”

Door open : On

Door closed : Off


WI

THE TRUNK OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DIS-PLAY

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


THE TRUNK OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOTDISPLAY


• The trunk ajar warning is displayed continuously even though the trunk lid is closed.• The trunk ajar warning is not displayed even though the trunk lid is open.


1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect the CONSULT-III.2. Check the BCM input signals. Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> GO TO 3.


Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “TRUNK/GLAS-H” monitor value.

Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace BCM.

3.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the trunk lid opener switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-78, "Diagnosis Procedure". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 4.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

4.CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

Check the trunk lid opener switch. Refer to DLK-79, "Component Inspection". Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace combination meter.NO >> Replace trunk lid switch. Refer to DLK-244, "Removal and Installation".

“TRUNK/GLAS-H”

Trunk lid open : On

Trunk lid closed : Off


THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT
THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT


• The displayed ambient air temperature is higher than the actual temperature.• The displayed ambient air temperature is lower than the actual temperature.


NOTE:Check that the symptom is not applicable to the normal operating condition before starting diagnosis. Refer toMWI-123, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description".

1.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the ambient sensor signal circuit. Refer to HAC-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> GO TO 2.NO >> Repair harness or connector.

2.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR

Check the ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-65, "Component Inspection".Is the inspection result normal?YES >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp.NO >> Replace ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-115, "Removal and Installation".


WI

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONCOMPASS

COMPASS : Description INFOID:0000000004246465

COMPASS• The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic fields. However, some large

changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited to): high tension power lines,large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic car washes, large piles of scrap metal, etc. Whilethis does not happen very often, it is possible.

• During normal operation, the Compass Mirror will continuously update the compass calibration to adjust forgradual changes in the vehicle's magnetic “remnant” field. If the vehicle is subjected to high magnetic influ-ences, the compass may appear to indicate false headings, become locked, or appear that it is unable to becalibrated. If this occurs, perform the calibration procedure.

• If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked, ver-ify the correct zone variance.

Symptom Chart

INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description INFOID:0000000004246466

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATUREThe displayed ambient air temperature on the information display may differ from the actual temperaturebecause it is a corrected value calculated from the ambient sensor signal by the unified meter and A/C amp.Refer to MWI-27, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description" for details on the correction process.

POSSIBLE DRIVING DISTANCEThe calculated possible driving distance may differ from the actual distance to empty if the refueling amount isapproximately 15 (4 US gal, 3-3/10 Imp gal) or less. This is because the refuel control (moves the fuelgauge needle quicker than normal judging that the driver is refueling the vehicle) is not performed in such acase.

Symptom Cause Solution / Reference

The compass display reads “C”.

• Compass is not calibrated.• Incorrect zone variance setting.• Large change in magnetic field (Steel

bridges, subways, concentrations of metal, carwashes, etc.)

• Compass was calibrated incorrectly or in the presence of a strong magnetic field.

Perform Calibration. Refer to MWI-32, "De-scription".

Compass shows the wrong direction.

Compass does not change direction ap-pears “Locked”.

Compass does not show all the directions, one or more is missing.

The compass was calibrated but it “loses” calibration.

On long trips the compass shows the wrong direction.

Perform Zone Variation Setting if correct reading is desired in that location. Refer toMWI-32, "Description".


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >










WI

COMBINATION METER

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONCOMBINATION METER


REMOVAL

Cluster lid A assemblyRefer to IP-11, "Exploded View".

Combination meter

DISASSEMBLY


REMOVAL

JPNIA0497ZZ

1. Cluster lid A 2. Meter control switch 3. Cluster lid A under cover

4. Bracket (LH) 5. Bracket (RH) 6. Steering column cover upper

7. Steering column blind 8. Blind 9. Meter housing

10. Combination meter stay 11. Combination meter 12. Cluster lid A cover

JSNIA0102ZZ

1. Front cover 2. Unified meter control unit


COMBINATION METER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >1. Remove cluster lid A assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove screw (A) and remove combination meter stay (1).3. Remove screws (B) and remove cluster lid A cover (2).
4. Remove screws (A), (B) and remove combination meter (1).5. Remove meter control switch connector (2) from combination

meter.


Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000004246470

DISASSEMBLYDisengage the tabs to separate front cover.

ASSEMBLYAssemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

JSNIA0100ZZ

JSNIA0101ZZ


WI


C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M




REMOVALRefer to IP-11, "Exploded View".

DISASSEMBLY


REMOVAL1. Remove the display unit. Refer to AV-112, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove the unified meter and A/C amp and AV control unit as an assembly.3. Remove the bracket screws and remove the unified meter and A/C amp.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.NOTE:• Unified meter and A/C amp. screws are different from other screws. Never confuse them when installing.• Since AV control unit connector and unified meter and A/C amp. connector have the same from, be careful

not insert them wrongly.

JPNIA0498ZZ

1. Unified meter and A/C amp. 2. Bracket (LH) 3. AV control unit

4. Bracket (RH)


METER CONTROL SWITCH
METER CONTROL SWITCH



DISASSEMBLY


REMOVAL1. Remove combination meter.2. Remove screws (A) and remove bracket RH (1), LH (2).3. Remove screws (B) and remove meter control switch.


JPNIA0499ZZ

1. Cluster lid A 2. Meter control switch 3. Cluster lid A under cover

4. Bracket (LH) 5. Bracket (RH) 6. Steering column cover upper

7. Steering column blind 8. Meter housing

JPNIA0500ZZ


WI

COMPASS

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

A

O

P

M


COMPASS


Refer to MIR-16, "Exploded View".


Refer to MIR-16, "Removal and Installation".


CLOCK
CLOCK



DISASSEMBLY


REMOVAL1. Remove cluster lid C assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".2. Remove screws (A), (B), (C) and remove clock (1) in conjunction

with preset switch (2) from cluster lid C.3. Disengage the tabs to separate clock.

INSTALLATIONInstall in the reverse order of removal.NOTE:Never confuse screws when installing.

JSNIA0107ZZ

1. Clock 2. Cluster lid C 3. Preset switch

JPNIA1289ZZ


BRAKES

C

D

E

SECTION PBA

B

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

B

N

O

P

CONTENTS

PPREPARATION ............................................ 2

PREPARATION ................................................... 2Commercial Service Tool ..........................................2


PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ............................... 3

PEDAL TYPE ...............................................................3PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment ...............3

LEVER TYPE ...............................................................3LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment ...............4

PARKING BRAKE SHOE ................................... 5Adjustment ................................................................5

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 6

PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ............................ 6

PEDAL TYPE ...............................................................6

PEDAL TYPE : Exploded View ................................. 6PEDAL TYPE : Removal and Installation ................. 6PEDAL TYPE : Adjustment ...................................... 7

LEVER TYPE .............................................................. 7LEVER TYPE : Exploded View ................................. 7LEVER TYPE : Removal and Installation ................. 7LEVER TYPE : Adjustment ...................................... 8

PARKING BRAKE SHOE .................................. 9Exploded View .......................................................... 9Removal and Installation .......................................... 9Inspection and Adjustment ......................................10

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ............................................................12

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .................................................................12

Parking Drum Brake ................................................12Parking Brake Control .............................................12

PB-1Revision: 2009 October 2009 G37 Coupe

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004500557


Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E



C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


P

PERIODIC MAINTENANCEPARKING BRAKE SYSTEMPEDAL TYPE

PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500558

INSPECTION

Pedal Stroke

1. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the pedal stroke is withinthe specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

2. When brake warning lamp turns ON, check that the pedal stroke is within the specified number ofnotches. (Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

Inspect Components• Check each component for installation condition such as looseness.• Check the device assembly for bend, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.• Check the cables and equalizer for wear, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.• Check the parking brake switch, and replace it if necessary. Refer to BRC-72, "Component Inspection".

ADJUSTMENT1. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.2. Release the parking brake pedal by turning the adjusting nut with a deep socket wrench and loosening the

cable.3. Remove the adjusting hole plug from the disc rotor. Turn the

adjuster (1) in the direction (A) as shown in the figure using asuitable tool until the disc rotor is locked.

4. Turn back the adjuster 5 or 6 notches from the locked position.5. Rotate the disc rotor to check that there is no drag. Install the

adjusting hole plug.6. Adjust the cable with the following procedure.a. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 490 N (50 kg,

110 lb) for 10 strokes or more. b. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke by turning the adjusting

nut with a deep socket wrench.CAUTION:Never reuse the adjusting nut if the nut is removed.

c. Operate the parking brake pedal with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the pedal stroke is withinthe specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

d. Rotate the disc rotor with the parking brake pedal released and check that there is no drag. Refer to PB-10, "Inspection and Adjustment".

LEVER TYPE

StandardNumber of notches : Refer to PB-12, "Parking Brake Control"



JPFIB0002ZZ


LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500559

INSPECTION

Lever Stroke

1. Operate the parking brake lever with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the lever stroke is withinthe specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

2. When brake warning lamp turns ON, check that the lever stroke is within the specified number of notches.(Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

Inspect Components• Check each component for installation condition such as looseness.• Check the device assembly for bend, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.• Check the cables and equalizer for wear, damage and cracks. Replace if necessary.• Check the parking brake switch, and replace it if necessary. Refer to BRC-72, "Component Inspection".

ADJUSTMENT1. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.2. Release the parking brake lever by turning the adjusting nut with a deep socket wrench and loosening the

cable.3. Remove the adjusting hole plug from the disc rotor. Turn the

adjuster (1) in the direction (A) as shown in the figure using asuitable tool until the disc rotor is locked.

4. Turn back the adjuster 5 or 6 notches from the locked position.5. Rotate the disc rotor to check that there is no drag. Install the

adjusting hole plug.6. Adjust the cable with the following procedure.a. Operate the parking brake lever with a force of 294 N (30 kg, 66

lb) for 10 strokes or more. b. Adjust the parking brake lever stroke by turning the adjusting nut

with a deep socket wrench.CAUTION:Never reuse the adjusting nut if the nut is removed.

c. Operate the parking brake lever with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check that the lever stroke is withinthe specified number of notches. (Check it by listening to clicks of ratchet.)

d. Rotate the disc rotor with the parking brake lever released and check that there is no drag. Refer to PB-10, "Inspection and Adjustment".




JPFIB0002ZZ


PARKING BRAKE SHOE

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


P

PARKING BRAKE SHOE

Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500560

1. Adjust parking brake pedal (pedal type) or parking brake lever (lever type) stroke. Refer to PB-3, "PEDALTYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (pedal type), PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (levertype).

2. Perform parking brake break-in (drag on) operation by driving vehicle under the following conditions:• Drive forward• Vehicle speed: Approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH) set (constant and forward)• Parking brake operating force: 318.5 N (32.5 kg, 71.6 lb) set contact• Time: Approx. 35 sec.CAUTION:To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes afterevery break-in operation.

3. After the break-in procedure, check parking brake pedal (pedal type) or parking brake lever (lever type)stroke of parking brake.CAUTION:If it is out of the specification, adjust again. Refer to PB-3, "PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjust-ment" (pedal type), PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (lever type).


PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATIONPARKING BRAKE CONTROLPEDAL TYPE

PEDAL TYPE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004500561

PEDAL TYPE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004500562

REMOVAL1. Remove rear tires.2. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".3. Disconnect parking brake switch harness connector.4. Remove adjusting nut and loosen front cable. 5. Remove device assembly.6. Remove center console. Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View".

1. Return spring 2. Stopper rubber 3. Device assembly

4. Pedal pad 5. Adjusting nut 6. Parking brake switch

7. Lock plate 8. Front cable 9. Equalizer

10. Spring 11. Pin 12. Rear cable (left side)

13. Rear cable (right side)

A. Hexagon size: 14 mm (0.55 in) B. Hexagon size: 16 mm (0.63 in)

: Apply multi-purpose grease.

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

JPFIB0108GB



C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


P

7. Remove the center muffler and heat insulator. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".8. Separate front cable from rear cable, and remove front cable and spring.9. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. Refer to PB-9, "Exploded View". 10. Remove rear cable mounting bolts and nuts, pull out rear cable from vehicle.

INSTALLATIONNote the following, Install the reverse order of the removal.• Never reuse the adjusting nut.

PEDAL TYPE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500563

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust the parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-3, "PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment".LEVER TYPE

LEVER TYPE : Exploded View INFOID:0000000004500564

LEVER TYPE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004500565

REMOVAL1. Remove rear tires.2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View".3. Disconnect parking brake switch harness connector.4. Remove adjusting nut and loosen front cable. 5. Remove device assembly.6. Remove the center muffler and heat insulator. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".7. Separate front cable from rear cable, and remove front cable and spring.8. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. Refer to PB-9, "Exploded View". 9. Remove rear cable mounting bolts and nuts, pull out rear cable from vehicle.

INSTALLATION

1. Adjusting nut 2. Device assembly 3. Front cable

4. Rear cable (left side) 5. Rear cable (right side) 6. Pin

A. Hexagon size: 14 mm (0.55 in) B. Hexagon size: 16 mm (0.63 in)

: Apply multi-purpose grease.

Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols not described on the above.

JPFIB0091GB


< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >Note the following, Install the reverse order of the removal.• Never reuse the adjusting nut.
LEVER TYPE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500566

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATIONAdjust the parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment".


PARKING BRAKE SHOE

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


P

PARKING BRAKE SHOE



REMOVALWARNING:Clean any dust from the parking brake shoes and back plates with a vacuum dust collector. Neverblow with compressed air.1. Remove rear tires.2. Remove disc rotor.

• 1 piston (front caliper 1 piston) type: refer to BR-65, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER1 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".

• 1 piston (front caliper 2 piston) type: refer to BR-69, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CALIPER2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installation".

• 2 piston type: refer to BR-73, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Removal and Installa-tion".

CAUTION:Parking brake completely in the released position.

3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows:a. Fix the disc rotor with wheel nuts and remove the adjusting hole plug.b. Using suitable tool, rotate adjuster (1) in the direction (B) to

retract and loosen brake shoe.4. Remove anti-rattle pins, retainers, anti-rattle springs, and return

spring, adjuster spring.CAUTION:Never drop the removed parts.

5. Remove parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly, and togglelever.CAUTION:

1. Back plate 2. Parking brake shoe 3. Adjuster

4. Adjuster spring 5. Return spring 6. Anti-rattle spring

7. Retainer 8. Anti-rattle pin 9. Toggle lever

: Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease.

JPFIB0046ZZ

JPFIB0007ZZ


PARKING BRAKE SHOE
• The parking brake shoes for the front wheels are made of different materials from those for therear wheels. Never misidentify them when removing.

• Never drop the removed parts.6. For the removal of back plate, refer to RAX-7, "Exploded View".

INSTALLATIONNote the following, install in the reverse order of removal.• Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the back plate and brake shoe.

CAUTION:The parking brake shoes for the front wheels are made of different materials from those for the rearwheels. Never misidentify them when removing and replacing.

• Assemble adjusters so that threaded part is expanded when rotat-ing it in the direction shown by arrow.

• Shorten adjuster by rotating it.• When disassembling apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or sil-

icone-based grease to threads.• Check brake shoe sliding surface and drum inner surface for

grease. Wipe it off if it adhere on the surfaces.

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004500569

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Lining Thickness Inspection• Check thickness (A) of lining.

Drum Inner Diameter Inspection• Check inner diameter (B) of drum.

Other InspectionsCheck the following items, and replace the parts if necessary.• Lining for excessive wear, damage, and peeling.• Brake shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage.• Anti-rattle pin and retainer for excessive wear, damage and rust.• Adjuster spring, return spring and anti-rattle spring for settling, excessive wear, damage, and rust.

A : For right side brake

B : For left side brake

: Vehicle front

: Adjuster expands

JPFIB0009ZZ

LimitA : Refer to PB-12, "Parking Drum Brake".

SBR021A

LimitB : Refer to PB-12, "Parking Drum Brake".

JPFIB0008ZZ


PARKING BRAKE SHOE

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

A

B

B

N

O

P


P

• Adjuster for smoothness.• Toggle lever for excessive wear, damage and rust.• Visually check inside of the drum for excessive wear, cracks, and damage with a pair of vernier calipers.

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION1. Adjust the parking brake pedal (pedal type), or parking brake lever (lever type) stroke. Refer to PB-3,

"PEDAL TYPE : Inspection and Adjustment" (pedal type), PB-4, "LEVER TYPE : Inspection and Adjust-ment" (lever type).

2. Check a drag of the parking brake.CAUTION:If any drag is found, inspect the rear disc brake.• 1 piston (front caliper 1 piston) type: refer to BR-67, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CAL-

IPER 1 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".• 1 piston (front caliper 2 piston) type: refer to BR-72, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (FRONT CAL-

IPER 2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".• 2 piston type: refer to BR-76, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY (2 PISTON TYPE) : Inspection".

3. Adjust the parking brake shoe. Refer to PB-5, "Adjustment".



Parking Drum Brake INFOID:0000000004500570

Unit: mm (in)

Parking Brake Control INFOID:0000000004500571

Item Limit

Brake lining 1.5 (0.059)

Drum (disc of inner diameter) 173 (6.81)

Item Standard

Control type Pedal type Lever type

Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)] 2 – 3 notches 7 – 8 notches

Number of notches when brake warning lamp turns ON 1 notch


infiniti g37-09-coupe5

Documents